JP6501809B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine using gaming media.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, various effects are performed using an image display device provided with a liquid crystal screen, an audio output device (speaker), a motorized role, etc., to improve the player's interest.
For example, the effect pattern is determined based on the lottery result of the symbol performed with the game ball entering the starting opening as a trigger, and the effect image is displayed on the image display device according to the effect pattern, and the sound is output Generally, effects such as music and sound effects flow from the device (see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2015-062748, A

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of producing effects that can enhance the interest of a game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and can be realized by the following modes.
In the gaming machine of the first aspect, a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined special game upon establishment of a start condition, an image display device capable of displaying an image relating to an effect, and the determination means Design variation display means for variably displaying a design based on a determination result, and production control means for performing, using the image display device, variation production of a production pattern based on the determination result along with the variation display of the pattern Audio control means for controlling the output of audio based on the audio information from the audio output means according to the progress of the variable effect, and operation means operable by the player. And a setting unit capable of setting an operation effective period for effectively receiving an operation on the operation unit during execution of the fluctuation effect, wherein the voice control unit is configured to advance the fluctuation effect while the fluctuation effect is in progress. To output the specific sound corresponding the specific sound has a first sound and a second sound output after the first sound, the, the voice control means,
Wherein when the operating lifetime in the output of the second audio is started, the output of the second audio is stopped, after stopping the output of the second audio, the operation in the operation lifetime When the means is operated, when the effect of the first effect content based on the determination result is executed, the sound related to the second sound and output according to the first effect content is output, and the determination When the effect of the second effect content based on the result is executed, while the voice corresponding to the second effect content is output, the operation effective period is performed when the operation means is not operated in the operation effective period. After the completion of the second, when the effect of the first effect content based on the determination result is executed, the voice related to the second sound and output according to the first effect content is output, and based on the determination result Of the second production contents When the output is executed, the voice corresponding to the content of the second effect is output, and after the voice corresponding to the content of the second effect is output, the first voice is output at a predetermined timing, and The present invention is characterized in that the first sound is not output until the predetermined condition is satisfied after the sound corresponding to the first effect content is output.

  As configured as described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine capable of producing effects that can enhance the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic plan view which shows a part of embodiment of this invention. It is the perspective view which showed an example of the back side of the game machine which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a game control device provided in the game machine according to the present embodiment. It is a block diagram of an image control board. It is a figure showing an example of a jackpot determination table. It is the figure which showed an example of the symbol determination table which determines the stop symbol of a special symbol. It is the figure which showed an example of a hit common symbol determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a big hit end setting data table. It is the figure which showed an example of the special electric winning combination operation mode decision table which decides the opening and closing condition of big winning a prize mouth. It is a figure showing composition of a big hit opening opening mode decision table for jackpots. It is a figure showing composition of a big winning opening opening mode decision table for small hits. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern determination table of a normal gaming state (for low probability gaming state). It is a figure showing an example of a change pattern determination table for high probability game state. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern decision table for the specific game period (for low probability game state) after the small hitting. It is a figure showing an example of a common motor-operated part operation mode determination table. It is a time chart which shows the energization timing of starting opening opening-and-closing solenoid for every table. It is the figure which showed an example of the prior determination table for determining beforehand the result of a big hit lottery. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interruption processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the input control processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the 1st starting opening detection switch input processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the prior determination processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the gate detection switch input process by the main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure special electric power control processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart explaining special symbol memory judging processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit judging processing by a main control board. It is a flow chart explaining special symbol change processing by a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol stop processing by the main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit game processing by the main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the small hitting game processing by the main control board. It is a flow chart explaining special game end processing by a main control board. It is a flow chart explaining the drawing control control processing by the main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol change processing by the main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the normal motorized role thing control processing by a main control board. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation production pattern determination table based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the 1st special symbol display device. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation production pattern determination table based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the 2nd special symbol display device. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing by a production control board. It is a flow chart explaining timer interruption processing by a production control board. It is a flow chart explaining command analysis processing 1 by a production control board. It is a flow chart explaining command analysis processing 2 by a production control board. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation production pattern determination processing by a production control board. It is a flowchart explaining the production | presentation input control processing by a production | presentation control board. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing by an image control board. It is a flowchart explaining the interruption process of an image control board. It is a figure showing an example of an animation pattern for displaying animation of a production pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a display list configured of a drawing control command group. It is a figure showing the composition of the voice control circuit concerning this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the audio | voice control processing by an image control board. It is a flowchart explaining the master volume setting process by an image control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the audio | voice management table with which an image control board | substrate is equipped (the 1). It is a figure which shows an example of the audio | voice management table with which an image control board is equipped (the 2). It is a flowchart which shows the system sound setting process by an image control board. It is a flowchart which shows the production sound setting process by an image control board. It is a flow chart explaining processing during voice output by an image control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the audio | voice channel selection process by an image control board. It is a flowchart explaining the audio | voice channel selection process by the image control board which concerns on this embodiment. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is a figure explaining the confirmation sound emitted from a voice output device (speaker) when a cross key is operated while waiting for a customer (part 1). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is a diagram for explaining the confirmation sound emitted from the voice output device (speaker) when operating the cross key while waiting for a customer (part 2). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is a figure explaining the confirmation sound emitted from a voice output device (speaker), when operating a cross key at the time of a change. FIG. 61 is a flowchart for describing soft volume adjustment processing (using the left and right keys) by the image control board described with reference to FIGS. 58, 59, and 60. FIG. It is a flowchart which demonstrates in detail the audio | voice output processing by the audio | voice control circuit which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the false branch effect performed with the game machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 17 is a second diagram to explain the on-the-off branch effect performed by the gaming machine according to the embodiment; It is a timing chart (the 1) showing the voice output mode in the hit branch effect of this embodiment. It is a timing chart (the 2) showing the voice output mode in the hit branch effect of this embodiment. It is a timing diagram (the 3) which shows the sound output mode in the hit branch effect of this embodiment. It is a timing diagram (the 4) which shows the sound output mode in the hit branch effect of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the output mode of the presentation sound in the big hit game in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the timing of the background sound and sound effect when production | presentation mode changes. It is a figure (the 1) showing volume control in case a background sound and a sound effect overlap. It is a figure (the 2) showing volume control in case a background sound and a sound effect overlap. It is a figure which shows the notice production determination table used when CPU of a production control board selects a notice production in this embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of effects selected and executed using the fluctuation effect determination table shown in FIGS. 36 and 37 and the advance notification effect determination table shown in FIG. 48; It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of an effect selected and performed using the fluctuation production determination table shown in FIG. 36, FIG. 37, and the advance presentation determination table shown in FIG. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is a diagram for explaining the winning sound to be issued during the round game. It is a flowchart explaining the prize notification process in the round game by an image control board. It is a figure which shows the transition of the production | presentation display accompanying the reach | attainment alerting | presentation production in this embodiment. FIG. 7 is a timing chart showing an audio output mode in a specific effect mode in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the stop aspect of the production | presentation symbol in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of the output mode of the fluctuation stop sound in, when a plurality of production | presentation symbols stop fluctuation simultaneously. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is a timing diagram showing an output mode of the fluctuation stop sound in the case where a plurality of effect symbols temporarily stop fluctuation. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of the output mode of the fluctuation | variation stop sound in, when the production | presentation pattern on either side carries out temporary stop of fluctuation simultaneously at the time of reach production. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is a timing diagram showing the output mode of the fluctuation stop sound in the case where the left and right effect symbols temporarily stop fluctuation at the time of reach effect. It is a figure which shows the aspect from the stop aspect of the production | presentation symbol in the game machine of this embodiment to the immediately after a fluctuation | variation start. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of the output mode of the fluctuation | variation start sound in, when three production | presentation patterns start fluctuation | variation simultaneously. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is a timing diagram showing an example of an output aspect of the fluctuation start sound in the case where three effect symbols start fluctuation simultaneously.

Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail by embodiments shown in the drawings.
<Configuration of gaming machine>
FIG. 1 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a back side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a game control apparatus provided in the game machine according to the present embodiment.

In the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, the inner frame (opening and closing frame) 3 is mounted so as to be openable and closable on the outer frame 2 attached to the island structure of the game hall. It is attached.
A window 4a is formed in the glass frame 4, and a transparent plate 4b is attached to the window 4a. A game board 10 having a board on which game balls are punched is mounted on the inner frame 3, and the game balls roll and flow between the board of the game board 10 and the transparent plate 4b on the front side thereof. Is formed. The transparent plate 4 b is, for example, a glass plate, and is detachably fixed to the glass frame 4.

  Further, the glass frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 via the hinge mechanism 5 on one end side in the left and right direction (for example, on the left side facing the gaming machine), and the other end in the left and right direction The side (e.g., the right side facing the gaming machine) is pivotable in a direction to open it from the outer frame 2. The glass frame 4 covers the game board 10 together with the glass plate 4b and can be opened like the door with the hinge mechanism 5 as a fulcrum to open the inner part of the outer frame 2 including the game board 10. At the other end side of the glass frame 4, a lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the glass frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is provided. Fixation by the lock mechanism can be released by a dedicated key. Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with a door opening switch 136 (see FIG. 3) that detects whether the glass frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or not.

A tray unit 7 having a storage tray 6 (upper tray 6a and lower tray 6b) for storing gaming balls is provided in the lower portion (lower side portion of the window 4a) of the glass frame 4. The player discharges the game ball stored in the lower plate 6b to the outside of the gaming machine, the effect button 8 (FIG. 2) which can be pressed, the cross key 40 (FIG. 2) which the player can execute various selection operations It is equipped with a discharge button 9.
The effect button 8 is enabled, for example, only when a message for operating the effect button 8 is displayed on the image display device 31 described later. The effect button 8 is provided with an effect button detection switch 8a (see FIG. 4). When the effect button detection switch 8a detects an operation of the player, a further effect is executed according to the operation.
In addition, the cross key 40 is provided with a cross key detection switch 40 (upper key detection switch 40a, lower key detection switch 40b, left key detection switch 40c, right key detection switch 40d) (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 11 is provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 4. When the player touches the operation handle 11, the touch sensor 11a (see FIG. 4) in the operation handle 11 detects that the player touches the operation handle 11, and a launch control board to be described later Send a touch signal to 160. When receiving the touch signal from the touch sensor 11a (see FIG. 4), the emission control board 160 permits the energization of the emission solenoid 12a. Then, when the rotation angle of the operation handle 11 is changed, the gear directly connected to the operation handle 11 is rotated, and the knob of the emission volume 11b (see FIG. 4) connected to the gear is rotated. A voltage corresponding to the detected angle of the firing volume 11b is applied to the firing solenoid 12a provided in the gaming ball firing mechanism. Then, when a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 12a (see FIG. 3), the firing solenoid 12a operates in accordance with the applied voltage, and the gaming ball plays a game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 11 It is fired to the game area 10 a of the board 10.

  Around the game area 10a in the game board 10, an outer rail R1 and an inner rail R2 are provided. The outer rail R1 and the inner rail R2 guide the game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the upper part of the game area 10a when the operation handle 11 is operated. The game ball guided to the upper part of the game area 10a falls within the game area 10a. At this time, the gaming balls fall unpredictably due to the plurality of nails and windmills provided in the gaming area 10a.

  A center member 12 is disposed substantially at the center of the game board 10. The center member 12 is provided with an image display device 31 composed of a liquid crystal display device or the like, and an effect object device 32 imitating a "sword".

Further, in the game area 10a below the center of the center member 12, there is provided a first start opening 13 through which game balls can enter. A second starting port 14 is provided below the first starting port 13. The second start port 14 has an open / close door 14b, and is movably controlled to a first mode in which the open / close door 14b is maintained in a closed state and a second mode in which the open / close door 14b is in an open state . Therefore, when the second starting opening 14 is in the first mode, there is no winning opportunity for the game ball, and when it is in the second mode, the winning opportunity for the game ball is increased.
In the present embodiment, when the second starting opening 14 is controlled to the first mode, the game ball is prevented from entering the second starting opening 14. However, if there is less chance of entering the gaming ball in the first mode than in the second mode, the second mode is the second mode. The game ball may enter the starting opening 14. That is, the first aspect includes a state in which the game ball can not enter the second starting port 14 in an impossible or difficult manner.

  The first starting opening 13 and the second starting opening 14 are respectively provided with a first starting opening detecting switch 13a (see FIG. 4) for detecting entry of the gaming ball and a second starting opening detecting switch 14a. When the detection switches detect the entry of the game balls, a lottery for acquiring the right to execute a jackpot game described later (hereinafter, referred to as a jackpot lottery) is performed. In addition, even when the first starting opening detection switch 13a and the second starting opening detection switch 14a detect the entering of the gaming ball, a predetermined winning ball (for example, three gaming balls) is paid out.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, three game balls are paid out when the game balls enter the first starting opening 13 and the second starting opening 14, but It is not necessary to pay out with the ball entry. Further, for example, the number of payouts of the first start opening 13 may be three, the number of payouts of the second start opening 14 may be one, and so on.

  In the game areas 10a on both sides of the center member 12, gates 15 through which game balls can pass are provided. The gate 15 is provided with a gate detection switch 15a (see FIG. 4) for detecting passage of gaming balls, and when the gate detection switch 15a detects passage of gaming balls, a lottery of a normal symbol to be described later is performed .

  Furthermore, in the right play area 10a of the center member 12, there are provided a first large winning opening 16 and a second large winning opening 17 in which game balls can enter. Therefore, the game ball does not win the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 unless the game handle is rotated by a large amount and the game ball is not hit by a strong force.

  The first large winning opening 16 is normally maintained in a closed state by the open / close door 16b, making it impossible to enter the game ball. On the other hand, when the jackpot game to be described later is started, the open / close door 16b is opened, and the open / close door 16b functions as a receptacle for guiding the game ball into the first big winning opening 16, and the game ball is 1 It becomes possible to enter the big winning opening 16. The first large winning opening 16 is provided with a first large winning opening switch 16a, and when the first large winning opening switch 16a detects the entry of the game ball, a preset winning ball (for example, 15 balls) is set. The game ball is paid out.

  The second large winning opening 17 is normally maintained in a closed state by the movable piece 17b, making it impossible to enter the game ball. On the other hand, when a jackpot game to be described later is started, the movable piece 17b is operated and opened, and the movable piece 17b functions as a guideway for guiding the gaming ball into the second big winning opening 17, The game ball can enter the second large winning opening 17. A second large winning opening switch 17a is provided in the second large winning opening 17, and when the second large winning opening switch 17a detects the entry of a game ball, a preset winning ball (for example, 15 balls) is set. The game ball is paid out.

Furthermore, in the game area 10a, a plurality of general winning openings 18 are provided. When a game ball is won in each of the general winning openings 18, a predetermined winning ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out.
In the lowermost part of the game area 10a, the game ball which did not enter any of the general winning opening 18, the first starting opening 13, the second starting opening 14, the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 An out port 19 is provided for discharging the

The image display device 31 displays an image during standby while a game is not being performed, or displays an image according to the progress of the game. Above all, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 13 or the second starting opening 14, the effect pattern 35 for notifying the player of the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner.
The effect symbol 35 scrolls and displays, for example, three symbols (numbers) such as the first symbol (left symbol), the second symbol (right symbol), and the third symbol (middle symbol), and after the predetermined time has elapsed The scroll is stopped and a specific symbol (number) is displayed in an array.
As a result, while the symbols are being scrolled, the player is given an impression as if the lottery is currently being made, and the lottery results are informed to the player by the symbols displayed when the scrolling is stopped. By displaying various images, characters, and the like during the variable display of the effect pattern 35, the player is given a high expectation that the jackpot may be won.

Further, although not shown, a fourth symbol is displayed on the image display device 31 separately from the effect symbol 35. The fourth symbol is a symbol showing the fluctuation state of the effect symbol 35 used for informing the lottery result by the big hit lottery process.
The fourth symbol does not necessarily have to be displayed on the image display device 31, and may be displayed separately by providing a fourth symbol display lamp.

  At the upper part of the glass frame 4, a pair of left and right effect lighting devices 33 is equipped. The effect illumination devices 33 each include a plurality of lights, and perform various effects while changing the irradiation direction and the color of light of each light.

In addition, the effect illumination devices 33 each include a plurality of lights, and perform various effects while changing the irradiation direction and the color of light of each light.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 1 is provided with an audio output device 34 (see FIG. 4) including a speaker, and in addition to the above-mentioned respective rendering devices, BGM (background music), It outputs SE (sound effect) and so on, and performs effects by sound.

  Below the left side of the game area 10a, a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21, an ordinary symbol display device 22, a first special symbol hold indicator 23, and a second special symbol hold indicator 24 described later. , A display area 27 such as a normal symbol hold indicator 25 and a round number indicator 26 is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 reports the lottery result of the jackpot performed with the game ball having entered the first starting opening 13 as a trigger, and is constituted by a plurality of LEDs. That is, a plurality of special symbols corresponding to the lottery result of the jackpot are provided, and the special symbol (lighting mode) corresponding to the lottery result of the jackpot is displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 to play the lottery result Inform the person who The special symbols displayed in this manner are not displayed immediately, but are displayed in a stopped state after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (flickering).

More specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 13, a lottery for the jackpot is performed, but the lottery result for the jackpot is not immediately notified to the player, and the predetermined time is determined. The player is notified when it has elapsed. Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the big hit is stopped and displayed, and the lottery result is notified to the player.
The second special symbol display device 21 is for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot performed with the game ball entering the second starting opening 14 as a trigger, and the display mode is the first special symbol. It is the same as the display mode of the special symbol in the display device 20.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is for notifying of the lottery result of the normal symbol which is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 15 as a trigger. Although details will be described later, when the player wins a predetermined winning by the lottery of the normal symbol, the normal symbol display device 22 is turned on, and thereafter, the second starting port 14 is controlled to the second mode for a predetermined time. In addition, the game ball does not necessarily pass through the gate 15 and the lottery result is not notified immediately about this normal symbol, but the normal symbol changes, such as blinking the normal symbol display device 22 until a predetermined time passes. It is made to display.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 13 or the second starting opening 14 during a special symbol variation display or during a special game to be described later, certain conditions can not be obtained if a lottery for a big hit can not be made immediately. The jackpot lottery right is reserved. More specifically, the right to draw a jackpot by which game balls enter the first start hole 13 and is reserved is held as the first hold, and the game balls enter the second start hole 14 and held. The jackpot lottery right is reserved as a second hold.
In these two reservations, the upper limit reserved number is set to four, and the reserved number is displayed on the first special symbol holding display 23 and the second special symbol holding display 24, respectively.

And the upper limit reserved number of normal symbols is also set to four, and the reserved number is the same as the first special symbol hold display 23 and the second special symbol hold display 24 in the same manner as the normal symbol hold Displayed on the display 25.
The round number indicator 26 is for notifying the number of rounds of the round game to be performed during the special game described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back of the gaming machine 1, a main control board 110, an effect control board 120, a payout control board 130, a power supply board 170, a game information output terminal board 27, etc. are provided. Further, a power supply plug 171 for supplying power to the gaming machine is provided on the power supply substrate 170, and a power switch (not shown) is provided.

Next, the effect button 8 will be described.
The effect button 8 is incorporated in the central portion of the dish unit 7.
The effect button 8 is configured to be able to advance and retreat over a normal operation position (not shown), a pressed position retracted downward from the normal operation position, and a projecting operation position protruding upward from the normal operation position. . In addition, the effect button 8 is configured to be able to be pressed and operated from an arbitrary position including the normal operation position and the protruding operation position to the pressed position.
In addition, since the detailed structure of the effect button 8 is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-116168 etc. in the present specification, the description will be omitted.

<Configuration of Game Control Device>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a game control apparatus for controlling the progress of the game in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.
In FIG. 4, the main control board 110 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 110 includes at least a one-chip microcomputer 114 including a main CPU 111, a main ROM 112, and a main RAM 113, and an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control.
The main CPU 111 reads a program stored in the main ROM 112 based on an input signal from each detection switch to perform arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device or display, or according to the result of the arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards. The main RAM 113 functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the main CPU 111.

  On the input side of the main control board 110, the first start opening detection switch 13a, the second start opening detection switch 14a, the gate detection switch 15a, the first large winning opening detection switch 16a, the second large winning opening detection switch 17a, The general winning opening detection switch 18a is connected, and a detection signal of the game ball is input to the main control board 110.

In addition, on the output side of the main control board 110, a start opening opening and closing solenoid 14c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 14b of the second start opening 14 and a first large winning opening for opening and closing the opening and closing door 16b An open / close solenoid 16 c and a second large winning opening open / close solenoid 17 c for opening and closing the movable piece 17 b of the second large winning opening 17 are connected.
Furthermore, on the output side of the main control board 110, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the normal symbol display device 22, the first special symbol hold display 23, the second special symbol hold display A normal symbol hold display 25 and a round number display 26 are connected to output various signals through the output port.
Further, the main control board 110 outputs, to the game information output terminal board 27, an external information signal necessary for managing the game machine in the hall computer of the game arcade or the like.

The main ROM 112 of the main control board 110 stores a program for game control, which will be described later, data necessary for various games, and a table.
Further, the main RAM 113 of the main control board 110 has a plurality of storage areas.
For example, in the main RAM 113, a number of normal symbol holding (G) storage area, a normal symbol holding storage area, a first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area, a second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, a determination storage area , 1st special symbol storage area, 2nd special symbol storage area, high probability game frequency (X) storage area, time saving game frequency (J) storage area, round game frequency (R) storage area, opening frequency (K) storage area , 1st winning a prize opening ball number (C1) storage area, 2nd winning a prize opening ball number (C2) storage area, gaming state storage area, gaming state buffer, stop symbol data storage area, transmission data storage area for effect Etc. are provided. The gaming state storage area is provided with a time saving game flag storage area, a high probability gaming flag storage area, a special figure special power processing data storage area, and a common view general power processing data storage area. The above-described storage area is merely an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

  The game information output terminal board 27 is a board for outputting an external information signal generated in the main control board 110 to a hall computer or the like of the game arcade. The game information output terminal board 27 is connected to the main control board 110 by wiring, and is provided with a connector for connecting to a game hall computer or the like.

The power supply substrate 170 converts the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply plug 171 into a predetermined voltage and supplies it to each control substrate. Further, the power supply substrate 170 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine, and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control substrate 110 when the power supply voltage becomes lower than a predetermined value. Do. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 111 becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 111 becomes inactive. The backup power supply is not limited to the capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, and the capacitor and the battery may be used in combination.
In addition, a magnetic sensor 50 for detecting an unauthorized radio wave is connected to the main control board 110.

The effect control board 120 mainly controls each effect such as playing or waiting. The effect control board 120 includes a sub CPU 121, a sub ROM 122, and a sub RAM 123, and is communicably connected to the main control board 110 in one direction from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120. .
The sub CPU 121 reads out the program stored in the sub ROM 122 based on the command transmitted from the main control board 110 or the input signal from the effect button detection switch 8 a inputted through the lamp control board 140 and performs calculation. The processing is performed, and corresponding data is transmitted to the lamp control board 140 or the image control board 150 based on the process. The sub RAM 123 functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 121.

The sub ROM 122 of the effect control board 120 stores a program for effect control, data necessary for various games, and a table.
For example, a variation rendering pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a rendering pattern based on a variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110, a rendering symbol pattern determination for determining a combination of the rendering symbols 35 to be stopped and displayed A table (not shown) or the like is stored in the sub ROM 122. Note that the above-described tables merely list characteristic tables as an example of the tables in the present embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided in advance of the game. ing.

The sub RAM 123 of the effect control board 120 has a plurality of storage areas.
The sub RAM 123 includes a command receiving buffer, a game state storage area, a rendering mode storage area, a rendering pattern storage area, a rendering pattern storage area, a determination storage area (0th storage area), a first hold storage area and a second hold storage area Etc. are provided. The above-described storage area is merely an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

Further, the effect control board 120 is equipped with an RTC (real time clock) 124 for outputting the current time. The sub CPU 121 inputs a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time from the RTC 124, and executes various processes based on the current date and time.
The RTC 124 normally operates by the power from the gaming machine when power is supplied to the gaming machine, and by the power supplied from the backup power supply mounted on the power supply substrate 170 when the gaming machine is powered off Operate. Therefore, the RTC 124 can clock the current date and time even when the power of the gaming machine is turned off. The RTC 124 may be provided with a battery on the effect control board 120 and operated by the battery.

  The payout control board 130 performs launch control of gaming balls and payout control of prize balls. The payout control substrate 130 includes a payout CPU 131, a payout ROM 132, and a payout RAM 133, and is communicably connected to the main control substrate 110 in a bi-directional manner. The payout CPU 131 reads out the program stored in the payout ROM 132 based on the input signals from the payout ball counting switch 135 and the door opening switch 136 for detecting whether or not the gaming ball has been paid out, and performs arithmetic processing, The corresponding data is transmitted to the main control board 110 based on the process.

Further, on the output side of the payout control board 130, a payout motor 134 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the storage section of the gaming ball to the player is connected. The payout CPU 131 reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 132 based on the number-of-payouts designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 and performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 134 of the prize ball payout device to carry out predetermined prize Pay out the ball to the player. At this time, the payout RAM 133 functions as a work area of data at the time of calculation processing of the payout CPU 131.
Also, check whether the gaming ball lending device (card unit) (not shown) is connected to the payout control substrate 130, and if the gaming ball lending device (card unit) is connected, make the firing control substrate 160 fire the gaming ball Send launch control data to allow.
Further, the dispensing control board 130 is connected to a fullness detection switch 51 and a clogging detection switch 52.
The dish filling detection switch 51 is a switch for detecting that the storage bowl (lower plate) of the game ball is full.
The ball jam detection switch 52 is, for example, a switch for detecting clogging of the game balls in the passage for paying out the game balls from the storage portion of the game balls.

  The launch control board 160 grants launch when receiving the launch control data from the delivery control board 130. Then, the touch signal from the touch sensor 11a and the input signal from the firing volume 11b are read out, the firing solenoid 12a and the ball feeding solenoid 12b are controlled to be energized, and the gaming ball is fired.

The firing solenoid 12a is configured by a rotary solenoid. A launch member (not shown) is directly coupled to the launch solenoid 12a, and the launch solenoid 12a is rotated to rotate the launch member.
Here, the rotational speed of the firing solenoid 12 a is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control substrate 160. As a result, the number of launched gaming balls in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one shot is fired for each rotation of the firing solenoid. That is, the gaming ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.
The ball feed solenoid 12b is constituted by a straight-ahead solenoid and sends out the game balls on the upper tray 6a (see FIG. 1) one by one toward the launch member directly connected to the launch solenoid 12a.

The lamp control board 140 is bi-directionally connected to the effect control board 120, and the effect button detection switch 8a provided on the effect button 8 is connected to the input side of the lamp control board 140. The effect button detection switch When the detection signal is input from 8a, it is output to the effect control board 120.
In addition, the lamp control board 140 is connected to the effect character apparatus 32 for presentation and the effect illumination device 33 provided on the game board 10, and the lamp control board 140 uses the data transmitted from the effect control board 120. Based on the lighting control of the effect lighting device 33, or the drive control of the motor for changing the light irradiation direction. In addition, it controls the energization of a drive source such as a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect combination device 32. In the present embodiment, the effect role device 32 includes the effect button 8 because the effect button 8 is configured to protrude.

  The image control board 150 is connected to the effect control board 120 so as to be capable of bi-directional communication, and the image display device 31 and the audio output device 34 are connected to the output side thereof.

<Configuration of image control board>
Here, the configuration of the image control board 150 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the image control board.
The image control board 150 includes a host CPU 151, a host RAM 152, a host ROM 153, a CG ROM 154, a crystal oscillator 155, a VRAM 156, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 200 for performing image display control of the image display device 31.
Further, as described later, the VDP 200 includes a voice control circuit 300 for controlling voice output in the gaming machine.

The host CPU 151 instructs the VDP 200 to display the image data stored in the CGROM 154 on the image display device 31 based on a later-described effect pattern designation command received from the effect control board 120. Such an instruction is performed by setting data in the control register 201 of the VDP 200 and outputting a display list including drawing control commands.
Also, upon receiving the V blank interrupt signal and the drawing end signal from the VDP 200, the host CPU 151 appropriately performs interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the host CPU 151 also instructs the audio control circuit 300 included in the VDP 200 to output predetermined audio data to the audio output device 34 based on the effect pattern designation command received from the effect control board 120.
The host RAM 152 is built in the host CPU 151, functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the host CPU 151, and temporarily stores data read from the host ROM 153.

The host ROM 153 is a mask ROM, and is a program for control processing of the host CPU 151, symbol array information in which symbol numbers of rendering symbols are associated with types of rendering symbols 35, and a display for generating a display list. A list generation program, animation patterns for displaying animation of effect patterns, animation scene information, etc. are stored.
The animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation of the effect pattern, and stores combinations of animation scene information included in the effect pattern, display order of each piece of animation scene information, and the like. The animation scene information stores information such as weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, etc. doing.

The CGROM 154 comprises a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc. and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) etc. consisting of a set of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg 32 × 32 pixels) ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an alpha value indicating transparency of the image.
Further, the CGROM 154 stores, without compressing, palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying a color are associated.
The CGROM 154 may be configured to compress only part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Also, various known compression methods such as MPEG 4 can be used as the compression method of the movie.
In addition, a large number of audio data are also stored in the CGROM 154 as described later.

  The crystal oscillator 155 outputs a pulse signal to the clock generation circuit 205 of the VDP 200, and divides the frequency of this pulse signal to synchronize with the image display device 31 and a system clock for the VDP 200 to perform control in the clock generation circuit 205. A synchronization signal or the like for generating

The VRAM 156 is configured by an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed.
Further, the VRAM 156 draws or displays an image, a display list storage area 156a for temporarily storing a display list output from the host CPU 151, a development storage area 156b for storing image data expanded by the expansion circuit 206 First frame buffer 156c and a second frame buffer 156d. In addition, pallet data is also stored in the VRAM 156.
The two frame buffers 156c and 156d are alternately switched to the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer” each time drawing is started.

The VDP 200 is a so-called image processor, and reads out image data from any frame buffer (display frame buffer) based on an instruction from the host CPU 151, and based on the read out image data, a video signal (RGB signal etc.) Are generated and output to the image display device.
However, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the VDP 200 is not only an image processor, but has an audio output function.
Also, the VDP 200 includes a control register 201, a CG bus I / F 202, a CPU I / F 203, a clock generation circuit 205, an expansion circuit 206, a drawing circuit 207, a display circuit 208, a memory controller 209, voice control. And a circuit 300.

The control register 201 is a register for the VDP 200 to control drawing and display, and by writing and reading data to the control register 201, control of drawing and control of display are performed. The host CPU 151 can write and read data to and from the control register 201 via the CPU I / F 203.
The control register 201 is a system control register that performs basic settings necessary for the operation of the VDP 200, a data transfer register that performs settings necessary for data transfer, and a drawing that performs setting for controlling drawing. Six types of registers: registers, bus interface registers for setting necessary for accessing the bus, decompression registers for setting necessary for decompression of the compressed image, display registers for setting display control It has a register.

The CG bus I / F 202 is an interface circuit for communication with the CGROM 154, and image data from the CGROM 154 is input to the VDP 200 via the CG bus I / F 202.
The CPU I / F 203 is an interface circuit for communication with the host CPU 151, and the host CPU 151 outputs a display list to the VDP 200, accesses a control register, or various types of data from the VDP 200 via the CPU I / F 203. The host CPU 151 inputs an interrupt signal.

The data transfer circuit 204 transfers data between various devices.
Specifically, data transfer between the host CPU 151 and the VRAM 156, data transfer between the CGROM 154 and the VRAM 156, and data transfer between various storage areas (including a frame buffer) of the VRAM 156 are performed.
The clock generation circuit 205 receives a pulse signal from the crystal oscillator 155, and generates a system clock for determining the processing speed of the VDP 200. Further, a clock for synchronization signal generation is generated, and the synchronization signal is output to the image display apparatus through the display circuit.

The decompression circuit 206 is a circuit for decompressing the image data compressed in the CGROM 154, and stores the decompressed image data in the development storage area 153b.
The drawing circuit 207 is a circuit that performs sequence control based on a display list including drawing control commands.

The display circuit 208 generates an RGB signal (analog signal) indicating image color data as a video signal from the image data (digital signal) stored in the “display frame buffer” in the VRAM 156, and generates the generated video signal (analog signal). It is a circuit which outputs an RGB signal to the image display device 31. Further, the display circuit 208 also outputs to the image display device 31 synchronization signals (vertical synchronization signal, horizontal synchronization signal, etc.) for synchronizing with the image display device 31.
In the present embodiment, as a video signal, an RGB signal obtained by converting a digital signal into an analog signal is output to the image display device 31, but the video signal may be output as it is as a digital signal.

The memory controller 209 performs control to switch between the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame buffer” when instructed by the host CPU 151 to switch the frame buffer.
The audio control circuit 300 reads a predetermined program based on the command transmitted from the effect control board 120 and controls the audio output of the audio output device 34.
The voice control circuit 300 outputs voice using the voice data stored in the CGROM 154. In this case, the CGROM 154 includes an audio ROM 400 for storing audio data.

The sound data may not be stored in the CGROM 154, and the sound source ROM 400 may be separately provided in the VDP 154.
In this case, since more image data can be stored without storing voice data in the CG ROM 154 whose capacity is fixed, it is possible to make effects using images more colorful and impressive.

  Also, the audio control circuit 300 may not be included in the VDP 200 and may be provided independently in the image control board 150. In that case, the sound source ROM 400 may be included in the voice control circuit 300.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 112 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 18.

<Big hit judgment table>
Fig.6 (a) (b) is the figure which showed an example of the big hit determination table referred when judging the stop result of a special symbol variation as a big hit, and FIG. 1 is a jackpot determination table referred to in the special symbol display device, FIG. 6 (b) is a jackpot determination table referred to in the second special symbol display device 21. In the tables of FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, the jackpot probability is the same although the small jackpot probability is different.

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b) is composed of a low probability random number determination table and a high probability random number determination table, and referring to the gaming state, the low probability random number determination table or high probability The random number determination table is selected, and any one of "big hit", "small hit" and "loss" is determined based on the selected table and the extracted special symbol determination random number value.

  For example, according to the low probability random number determination table of the first special symbol display device 20 shown in FIG. 6A, two special symbol determination random number values of “7” and “317” are determined to be a big hit . On the other hand, according to the high probability random number determination table, "7", "37", "67", "97", "127", "157", "187", "217", "217", "247", "277" , “317”, “337”, “367”, “397”, “427”, “457”, “487”, “517”, “547”, “577” 20 special symbol judgment random numbers Is determined to be a jackpot.

Also, even if the low probability random number determination table or the high probability random number determination table is used, four special symbol determination random numbers of “50”, “100”, “150” and “200” are used. If it is a random number for symbol determination, it is determined as "small hit". In addition, when it is a random value other than the above, it is determined as "loss".
Therefore, since the random number range of the special symbol determination random number value is 0 to 598, in the jackpot determination table of the first special symbol display device 20, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot at low probability is 1 / 299.5, The probability of being judged as a jackpot at high probability is 10 times and 1 / 29.95. Also, the probability of being judged as a small hit is 1 / 149.75 for both the low probability and the high probability.

On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table of the second special symbol display device 21 shown in FIG. 6B, the special symbol determination random number value determined to be a jackpot at low probability and high probability is the first special symbol display 20 and Although it is the same, the special symbol determination random number value determined to be a small hit is different from the jackpot determination table in the first special symbol display device 20. For example, in the determination table in the second special symbol display device 21, it is determined that "small hit" only when the special symbol determination random number value is "50". And when it is a random value other than the above-mentioned, it is judged as "loss".
Therefore, in the low probability random number determination table in the second special symbol display device 21, as in the low probability random number determination table in the first special symbol display device 20, the probability that it is determined to be a big hit in low probability is 1 / 299.5 The probability of being judged as a jackpot at high probability is 10 times and 1 / 29.95. On the other hand, the probability of being judged as a small hit is 1/599 for both the low probability and the high probability.

<Collision judgment table>
Next, FIG. 6C is a diagram showing a hit determination table which is referred to when it is determined whether or not the stop result of the normal symbol variation is to be hit.
The hit determination table shown in FIG. 6C is composed of a non-time short game state random number determination table and a time short game state random number determination table, and referring to the game state, the non-time short game state random number determination table or time short game A state random number determination table is selected, and it is determined whether it is a "hit" or a "loss" based on the selected table and the extracted random number for collision determination.

For example, according to the random number determination table in the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 6C, one random number value of "0" is among the random symbol values of "0" to "19" for ordinary symbol determination. It is judged. On the other hand, according to the time reduction gaming state random number determination table, among the random number values for “0” to “19”, 19 random number values “0” to “18” are determined to be winnings. In addition, when it is a random value other than the above, it is determined as "loss".
Therefore, the probability that the normal symbol is determined to be a hit in the non-time-saving gaming state is 1/20, and the probability that the normal symbol is determined to be a hitting in the short-time gaming state is 19/20.

<Symbol determination table>
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol.
Fig.7 (a) is a big hit symbol determination table for determining a stop symbol at the time of big hit, FIG.7 (b) is a small hitting symbol determination table for determining a stop symbol at the time of small hit, and FIG.7 (C) is a lost symbol determination table for determining a stopped symbol when lost. In more detail, each symbol determination table is configured for each special symbol display device, and is configured of a symbol determination table for the first special symbol display device and a symbol determination table for the second special symbol display device.

In the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7A, the jackpot symbol random number value is referred to. Then, when it is determined that the first special symbol display device 20 is a big hit, if the big hit symbol random number value is "0" to "29", "01" (first special symbol 1) is determined as stop symbol data. Do. Furthermore, at the start of variation of the special symbol, based on the determined special symbol type (stop symbol data), the effect symbol designation command "E0H""01H" as information of the special symbol is generated.
Here, in the effect pattern specification command, one command is composed of 2 bytes of data, 1 byte of MODE indicating 1 byte for identifying the classification of control command, and 1 byte indicating contents (function) of control command to be executed. And DATA. The same applies to the fluctuation pattern designation command and the start winning prize designation command described later.

In addition, when it is determined that the first special symbol display device 20 is a big hit, if the big hit symbol random number value is "30" to "39", "02" (first special symbol 2) is determined as stop symbol data. At the start of variation of the special symbol, the effect symbol specification command "E0H""02H" is generated.
Similarly, if the jackpot symbol random number value is "40" to "49", "03" (the first special symbol 3) is determined as stop symbol data, and the effect symbol designation command "E0H""03H" If the big hit symbol random number value is “50” to “59”, “04” (first special symbol 4) is determined as stop symbol data, and the effect symbol designation command “E0H” “04H” is generated. If it is generated and the jackpot symbol random number value is "60" to "69", "05" (first special symbol 5) is determined as stop symbol data, and the effect symbol designation command "E0H""05H" is generated. If the winning symbol random number value is “70” to “99”, “06” (first special symbol 6) is determined as stop symbol data, and the effect symbol designating command “E0H” “06H” is generated. .

In addition, when it is determined that the second special symbol display device 21 is a big hit, if the big hit symbol random number value is "0" to "49", "07" (second special symbol 1) is determined as stop symbol data. At the start of variation of the special symbol, the effect symbol specification command "E1H""01H" is generated.
Similarly, if the jackpot symbol random number value is "50" to "59", "08" (the second special symbol 2) is determined as stop symbol data, and at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the designated symbol designation command If "E1H""02H" is generated and the jackpot symbol random number value is "60" to "69", "09" (the second special symbol 3) is determined as stop symbol data, and the effect symbol designation command " If the E1H "03H" is generated and the jackpot symbol random number value is "70" to "99", "10" (the second special symbol 4) is determined as stop symbol data, and the effect symbol designation command "E1H""04H" is generated.

  Next, in the small hitting symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7 (b), the small hitting symbol random number value is referred to. And, when it is determined that the first special symbol display device 20 is a small hit, if the small hit symbol random number value is “0” to “49”, “11” (special symbol A for small hit) as stop symbol data To determine). Then, at the start of variation of the special symbol, the effect symbol designating command “E0H” “0AH” is generated based on the type (stop symbol data) of the determined special symbol. Also, if the small hit symbol random number value is "50" to "99", "12" (special symbol B for small hit) is determined as stop symbol data, and at the start of variation of the special symbol, the effect symbol designation command Generate "E0H" and "0BH".

  Moreover, when the small hitting of the second special symbol display device 21 is, if the small hitting symbol random number value is “0” to “49”, “13” (special symbol A for small hitting) is determined as stop symbol data, If the production symbol specification command "E1H" "0AH" is generated and the small hit symbol random number value is "50" to "99", "14" (special symbol B for small hit) is determined as stop symbol data. , The production design specification command "E1H" "0BH" is generated.

  Next, in the lost symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7C, when it is determined that the first special symbol display device 20 is lost, "00" (special symbol 0 (loss) is determined as stop symbol data, and special symbol At the start of symbol variation, a production symbol designation command “E0H” “00H” is generated, and when it is determined that the second special symbol display device 21 is lost, “00” (special symbol 0 (special symbol 0 (stop symbol data)). The loss) is determined, and at the time of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the effect symbol specification command “E1H” “00H” is generated.

  In addition, since the gaming state (refer to FIG. 9) after the big hit end and the big hit mode (refer to FIG. 10) are determined by the kind of the special symbol (stop symbol data) as described later, the kind of special symbol is big hit It can be said that the game state after the game end and the jackpot mode are determined.

FIG. 8 is a view showing a normal symbol determination table referred to when determining the normal symbol based on the stop result of the normal symbol variation, and FIG. 8A shows the determination of the random number value for the hit determination. The normal symbol determination table to be referred to when it is determined to be a hit, and FIG. 8B is the normal symbol determination table to be referred to when it is determined to be a loss by the determination of the random number for collision determination.
In the ordinary symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), random symbol values (0 to 10) for ordinary symbols are referred to.
Then, when the normal symbol random number value of the normal symbol display device 22 is determined to be a hit in the hit determination table, as shown in FIG. 8A, the normal symbol random number values are "0" and "1". If there is, the long opening symbol is determined, and if the normal symbol random number value is “2” to “10”, the short opening symbol is determined.
In the case of the long open symbol, "01" is determined as the stop symbol data, and at the start of variation of the normal symbol, the effect symbol designation command "E8H""01H" is generated. Further, when the short opening symbol is determined, "02" is determined as the stop symbol data, and at the start of variation of the normal symbol, the effect symbol specifying command "E8H""02H" is generated.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol random number value of the normal symbol display device 22 is hit and it is determined to be lost in the judgment table, the normal symbol random number values are “0” to “10” as shown in FIG. The lost symbol is determined regardless of the value.
In the case of the lost symbol, "00" is determined as the stop symbol data, and at the start of variation of the normal symbol, the effect symbol specification command "E8H""00H" is generated. In addition, about a long opening pattern and a short opening pattern, it demonstrates in detail later.

<Big hit end setting data table>
FIG. 9 is a jackpot end setting data table for determining the gaming state after the jackpot end.
Setting of high probability game flag, high probability game number of times based on the kind of special symbol (stop symbol data) and the game condition at the time of big hit winning which is stored in the game state buffer by the big hit end setting data table shown in FIG. The setting of (X), the setting of the time saving game flag, and the setting of the time saving game frequency (J) are performed.
Note that "00H" in the gaming status buffer indicating the gaming status at the time of jackpot win indicates gaming status information in which both the time saving game flag and the high probability gaming flag are not set, and "01H" indicates that the time saving game flag is set The high probability game flag indicates gaming state information being set, but "02H" indicates gaming state information in which the short time game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set, "03H" “” Indicates gaming state information in which both the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag are set.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol data of the first special symbol display device 20 is “01” to “04”, that is, when the first special symbol 1 to 4 is won, the gaming state after the big hit ends It is set to a time-saving gaming state and a high probability gaming state (a so-called probability variation gaming state). At this time, 10000 times is set to each of the time saving game count (J) and the high probability game count (X).

  Also, when the stop symbol data of the first special symbol display device 20 is "05", that is, when the first special symbol 5 is won, the gaming state after the big hit is non-time-short gaming state and high probability gaming It sets to a state (what is called a latent probability change game state). At this time, 0 is set to the time saving game frequency (J), and 10000 times is set to the high probability game frequency (X).

  Also, when the stop symbol data of the first special symbol display device 20 is "06", that is, when the first special symbol 6 is won, the gaming state after the big hit is time saving game state and non-high probability game It sets to a state (what is called, time saving game state). At this time, 100 times are set to the number of time saving games (J), and 0 times is set to the high probability number of games (X).

Also, when the stop symbol data of the first special symbol display device 20 is "11""12", that is, when winning a special symbol A, B for small hit, the game state after the small hit is a small hit It is made to be the same as the gaming state at the time of winning, that is, the gaming state at the time of small hitting is continued.
However, when the small hitting status game state buffer is 00H, that is, in the low probability gaming state and non time saving gaming state, in the specific gaming period after the small hitting end, in order to perform a specific effect, dedicated The number of specific periods is set so that the variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 15) is determined.

  Specifically, the specific period number (T) is set 50 times so that the specified gaming period is reached until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 50 times after the small hitting ends. During this specific game period (when the specific period number (T)> 0), the fluctuation pattern determination table for the specific game period (for the low probability gaming state) after the small hitting shown in FIG. 15 is determined as described later. , Other than the specified game period (when the number of specified periods (T) = 0), it is for the high probability game state shown in the variation pattern determination table of the normal game state (for low probability game state) shown in FIG. The variation pattern determination table of is determined.

  If the stop symbol data of the second special symbol display device 21 is "07" to "09", that is, if the second special symbols 1 to 3 are won, the game state after the big hit ends in the time-saving game state And it sets to the high probability game state (so-called, probability variation game state). At this time, 10000 times is set to each of the time saving game count (J) and the high probability game count (X).

  Also, when the stop symbol data of the second special symbol display device 21 is "10", that is, when the second special symbol 4 is elected, the gaming state after the big hit is time saving game state and non-high probability game It sets to a state (what is called, time saving game state). At this time, 100 times are set to the number of time saving games (J), and 0 times is set to the high probability number of games (X).

Also, when the stop symbol data of the second special symbol display device 21 is "13""14", that is, when winning a special symbol A, B for small hit, the game state after the small hit is a small hit It is made to be the same as the gaming state at the time of winning, that is, the gaming state at the time of small hitting is continued.
However, when the small hitting status game state buffer is 00H, that is, in the low probability gaming state and non time saving gaming state, as in the case of the first special symbol display device 20, after the small hitting end special symbol The number of specified period times (T) is set 50 times so that the specified gaming period is reached until the variable display is performed 50 times.

<Special electric bill and box operation mode determination table>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special electric combination product operation mode determination table for determining the opening and closing conditions of the special winning opening.
With reference to the special electric character product operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 10, based on the type of special symbol (stop symbol data), the operation mode of the special winning opening, ie, the number of round games (R) and the opening of the special winning opening A winning opening opening mode determination table for determining the mode is determined. In the present embodiment, “table” is appropriately omitted and described as “TBL”.

Specifically, when the stop symbol data is "01", the number of round games R is determined to be "16", and the release mode table is determined to be "1 TBL per long" described later.
Also, when the stop symbol data is "02", the number of round games R is determined to be "16", the release mode table is determined to be "1 TBL per development" described later, and when the stop symbol data is "03", the round game is The number of times R is determined to be “16”, and the release mode table is determined to be “2TBL per development” described later.
Also, when the stop symbol data is "04" and "05", the number of round games R is determined to be "4", the release mode table is determined to be "short TBL" described later, and the stop symbol data is "06". The round game frequency R is determined to be "16", and the opening mode table is determined to be "2TBL per long" described later.

  Furthermore, when the stop symbol data is "07", the number of round games R is determined to be "16", the open mode table is determined to be "1 TBL per long", and when the stop symbol data is "08", the number of round games R is Is determined as "16 T" for the open mode table and "1 TBL per development", and when the stop symbol data is "09", the round game frequency R is determined to "16" and the open mode table is "2 TBL per development" When the stop symbol data is "10", the number of round games R is determined to be "16", and the release mode table is determined to be "1 TBL per long".

<Big winning opening opening mode decision table>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the configuration of the special winning opening opening mode determination table determined in FIG. 10, and the opening / closing door 16b of the first special winning opening 16 or the large winning opening opening mode determination table shown in FIG. The opening and closing conditions of the movable piece 17b of the second large winning opening 17 are determined.
The big winning opening opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 11 is a table to be referred to in the case of a big hit game, and is composed of 1 TBL per long, 2 TBL per long, TBL per short, 1 TBL per development, 2 TBL per development .
Then, the long game is executed based on the long TBL, the short game is executed based on the short TBL, and the development per game is performed based on the development TBL.

  In the big hit opening opening mode decision table for the jackpot shown in FIG. 11, the type (1st big winning opening 16 or the 2nd big winning opening 17) of the big winning opening to open and the maximum round game in one big hit game The number (R), the specified number indicating the maximum winning number for the big winning opening in one round, the start interval time from the start of the big hit game to the execution of the first round game, and the big winning opening in each round game Maximum number of opening (K), opening time of big winning opening for one opening of each round game, closing time of big winning opening for one opening of each round game, 1 The closing interval time of the big winning opening from the end of one round game to the execution of the next round game and the ending interval time from the end of the last round game to the end of the big hit game are stored It has been.

  Here, at 1 TBL per long shown in FIG. 11, the open / close door 16b of the first large winning opening 16 can be operated to open the first large winning opening 16 up to a maximum of 29 seconds per round. However, if the specified number (9) of game balls win the first large winning opening 16 before the opening time passes 29 seconds, the operation of the open / close door 16b is finished, and the game of one round is finished. It will be. In this case, the maximum round game number R is set to 16 rounds.

In addition, at 2TBL per long shown in FIG. 11, the open / close door 16b of the first large winning opening 16 can be operated to open the first large winning opening 16 up to a maximum of 29 seconds per round like the 1TBL per long it can. Then, when the specified number (9) of game balls win the first large winning opening 16 in one round, the operation of the open / close door 16b is finished, and the game of one round is finished. Also in this case, the maximum round game number R is set to 16 rounds.
However, the opening mode of the first large winning opening 16 in 2TBL per long is the same as 1TBL per long from the first round to the fourth round, but the opening mode after the fifth round is different from 1TBL per long ing. That is, at 2 TBL per long, after the fifth round, the maximum opening time of the first big winning opening 16 is set to an extremely short time of 0.052 seconds, and it is difficult for the game ball to win the first big winning opening 16 It is made to be in the state.
As described above, in the present embodiment, by providing 1 TBL per long and 2 TBL per long, the type of big winning opening and the number of maximum round games are the same, and the jackpot game with different numbers of balls that the player can acquire It can be realized.

  Further, in the short hitting TBL shown in FIG. 11, the movable piece 17b of the second large winning opening 17 is operated to open the second large winning opening 17 for a maximum of 0.052 seconds per round. However, also in this case, when the specified number (9) of game balls win the second large winning opening 17 in one round, the operation of the movable piece 17b is ended and the game of one round is ended. become. In this case, the maximum round game number R is set to 4 rounds.

  In addition, at 1 TBL per development and 2 TBL per development shown in FIG. 11, the movable piece 17b of the second large winning opening 17 can be operated to open the second large winning opening 17 a plurality of times in one round. However, also in this case, when the specified number (9) of game balls win the second large winning opening 17 for one round, the operation of the movable piece 17b of the second large winning opening 17 ends, and one The round game will end. That is, it does not necessarily open three times (K = 3) for one round.

Moreover, in this embodiment, although 1 TBL per development and 2 TBL per development have an open aspect common to the 2nd round, the open aspect is different after the 3rd round. That is, according to 1TBL per development, the opening time of the second large winning opening 17 is set to 0.052 seconds and a short time after the third round, and the game ball is won in the second large opening 17 It becomes difficult, but according to 2TBL per development, the opening time of the second big winning opening 17 is set to the same maximum 29 seconds as the 1st round and the 2nd round according to the 3rd round and the 4th round Therefore, the game ball is in an easy-to-winning state in the second large winning opening 17.
By configuring in this way, it can be difficult to determine which development per game is being played among a plurality of development per game until a predetermined round (the second round), and during a big hit game of development per game Even more favorable development per game (2 TBL per development) can be expected to be controlled.

In the present embodiment, in the second round of development per game (2 rounds or after the fourth round), the game ball is made difficult to win the second big winning opening 17, but the most advantageous development per game It is not necessary for the gaming ball to provide a difficult winning condition.
Further, in the present embodiment, the opening time and closing time of 1TBL per development and 2TBL per development are set to the same time. However, even if the same time is not set, a difference in time may be provided such that it is difficult to determine which of the plurality of games per development is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the "long play game" for opening the first big winning opening 16 in a long opening time and the "short hitting game" for opening the second large winning opening 17 in a short opening time There are provided three types of "big hit games" with "development per game" which causes the second big winning opening 17 to be opened in a single round.
In the present embodiment, "big hit game" is referred to as "special game".

  In addition, as a feature of the special motorized service item operation mode determination table shown in FIG. 10, in the second special symbol display device 21 which is operated when the game ball enters the second starting opening 17, “shorting TBL Is configured not to be determined. This is because, in the non-time-short game state, the game ball hardly enters the second start opening 17 but if the short hit is determined when the game ball enters the second start opening 17 This is because there is a risk that the player's willingness to play the game may be reduced even if the time saving game state is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol display device 21 is configured not to determine "short TBL", but the second special symbol display device 21 also determines "short TBL". You may configure it. However, in the case of determining "short hit TBL" in the second special symbol display device 21, compared to the first special symbol display device 20 which is activated when the game ball enters the first starting opening 14, It is desirable that the “short TBL” be hard to be determined.

  Furthermore, according to the variation pattern determination table for the normal gaming state (for the low probability gaming state) shown in FIG. 13, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has the variation pattern for the probability variation gaming state (for high probability gaming state) shown in FIG. In the decision table, the percentage of winning a jackpot which is advantageous to the player is high, that is, from the first special symbol 11, it is easier to win the jackpot which is advantageous to the player during the short time game It has become.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the configuration of the opening form table of the large winning opening at the small hitting determined in FIG. 10, and the second large opening at the small hitting by the large winning opening opening determining table shown in FIG. The opening and closing conditions of the movable piece 17b of the winning opening 17 are set.
When the small hit open mode determination table shown in FIG. 12 is determined, the small hit game in which the movable piece 17b of the second large winning opening 17 repeats 0.052 seconds open and 2.000 seconds closed is executed. Be done. Since this small hit game is regarded as one game in which the movable piece 17b of the second big winning opening 17 is continuously repeated four times, the concept of "round game" in the above long hit game and short hit game Although the control is performed without using, the opening / closing mode of the second big winning opening 17 is substantially the same as that of the short hit game. This makes it possible to give the player the pleasure of guessing whether it is a small hit or a short hit. However, even if the opening and closing modes are approximated to such an extent that it is impossible or difficult to determine whether the player is a small hit or a short hit, even if the opening time and closing time are not set exactly the same, The interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, since the opening time (0.052 seconds) of "short hit" or "small hit" is shorter than the time when one gaming ball is fired (about 0.6 seconds) as described above, the second large Even if the movable piece 17b of the winning opening 17 is opened, it is difficult to win a prize in the large winning opening 25, and the "short hit" or "small hit" opening mode can be said to be an "unfavorable opening mode". On the other hand, the "long" opening time (29.5 seconds) is longer than the time when one gaming ball is fired (about 0.6 seconds), so it can be said to be an "advantage opening mode".

<Variation pattern determination table>
FIGS. 13 to 15 are diagrams showing a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, and FIG. 13 shows a normal gaming state (low) which is referred to a normal gaming state (for low probability gaming state). 14 is an example of a variation pattern determination table for probability gaming state, FIG. 14 is an example of a variation pattern determination table for high probability gaming state to be referred to in the high probability gaming state, and FIG. It is an example of a change pattern determination table for a specific gaming period (for a low probability gaming state) after a small hit which is referred to in a specific gaming period of.
In addition, as described in the description of the big hit end setting data table shown in FIG. 9, the specific game period after the small hit end is determined only when the low hit game state and the non-short play state are all at the time of the small hit. It is not possible.

Specifically, according to the variation pattern determination table, the type of special symbol display device, random value for special symbol determination (win or win of big hit), random value for big hit symbol (big hit symbol), presence of time saving game state, special symbol The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number of reservations, the random number for reach determination, and the random value for fluctuation pattern.
The variation pattern is determined at the start of variation of the special symbol, and a variation pattern specification command is generated based on the determined variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 120 in the output control process.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the reach is always performed in the case of the big hit or the small hit, the reach determination random number is not referred to in the case of the big hit or the small hit.
With "reach" in this embodiment, after a part of the combination of the effect symbols 35 notifying that it shifts to a special game is stopped and displayed, the remaining part of the effect symbols 35 continue the fluctuation display Say For example, when the combination of the three-digit effect symbol 35 of "777" is set as the combination of the effect symbol 35 to notify transition to the big hit game, the two effect symbols 35 are stopped and displayed at "7" , The remaining effect pattern 35 is in a state of performing variable display.

  In addition, when the fluctuation pattern specification command is “E6H” as MODE, the game ball enters the first starting opening 13, and the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol of the first special symbol display device 20 Indicates that it is a fluctuation pattern specification command corresponding to the game mode, when the mode is "E7H", the game ball enters the second starting opening 14 and the fluctuation start of the special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 It indicates that it is a fluctuation pattern specification command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern. Then, DATA of the variation pattern specification command indicates a specific variation pattern number. That is, the variation pattern designation command is also referred to as information indicating a variation pattern.

<Variation pattern determination table for normal gaming state>
The structure of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
In the fluctuation pattern determination table, since the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol of the first special symbol display device 20 and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 are provided, first, the first special symbol display device 20 The variation pattern of the special symbol of is described.

  In the variation pattern determination table for the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 13, it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 is “7” or “317” and the jackpot is won, and the type of special symbol Is the first special symbol 1 (special symbol stop symbol data "01"), if the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "29", the variation time is 60000 ms as the variation pattern of the special symbol Select variation pattern 1. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designating command "E6H" "01H" corresponding to the variation pattern 1 is generated as the information of the special symbol. The change content of the change pattern 1 is, for example, a hit effect accompanied by the reach A.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 is won as a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is determined to be the first special symbol 1, the special figure variation random number value is " If it is 30 "-" 99 ", the fluctuation pattern 2 of 90000 ms is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Then, at the start of variation of the special symbol, a variation pattern specification command “E6H” “02H” corresponding to the variation pattern 2 is generated. The change content of the change pattern 2 is, for example, a hit effect with reach B.

  In addition, it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 2, 3 (stop symbol data "02" "03" of the special symbol In the case of), regardless of the special figure variation random number values “0” to “99”, the variation pattern 3 having a variation time of 75000 ms is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern specification command “E6H” “03H” corresponding to the variation pattern 3 is generated. The fluctuation content of the fluctuation pattern 3 is, for example, a symbol turning effect which makes (makes) the expectation pattern 35 to be in a reach state with a specific symbol (for example, “7”).

  In addition, it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won the big hit, the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 4 or the first special symbol 5 (stop symbol data "04 special symbol If "05"), the variation pattern 4 or the variation pattern 5 having a variation time of 60000 ms is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol regardless of the special figure variation random number values "0" to "99". Then, at the start of variation of the special symbol, a variation pattern designation command “E6H”, “04H” or “E6H”, “05H” corresponding to the variation pattern 4 or 5 is generated. The fluctuation content of the fluctuation pattern 4 or the fluctuation pattern 5 is, for example, a chance effect to expect to be a jackpot.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 6 (stop symbol data "06" of the special symbol), As in the case of the first special symbol 1, if the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "29", the variation pattern 1 described above is selected, and the special figure variation random number value is "30" to "99". If it is, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 2 is selected. The fluctuation pattern specification command and fluctuation contents of fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 are as described above.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 is won in a small hit, ie, when the stop symbol data "11" "12" of the special symbol, special figure variation for disturbance Regardless of the numerical values “0” to “99”, the variation pattern 6 having a variation time of 60000 ms is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designating command “E6H” “06H” corresponding to the variation pattern 6 is generated. The contents of change of the change pattern 6 are, for example, the same chance effect as the change patterns 4 and 5.

Next, the case where the random number value for special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 is a loss other than the above-mentioned big hit or small hit will be described.
When the special symbol determination random number value is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the gaming state, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure variation random number value.
Specifically, when the random value for special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 is lost (stop symbol data "00" of the special symbol) and the gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state, the first special symbol And the random number value for reach determination is “0” to “79”, regardless of the special figure variation random number values “0” to “99”, The variation pattern 7 in which the variation time is set to 10000 ms is selected. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command “E6H” “07H” corresponding to the variation pattern 7 is generated. The content of the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern 7 is, for example, a normal fluctuation.

On the other hand, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "0" to "2", the reach determination random number value is "80" to "99", and the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "69" If it is, the variation pattern 8 in which the variation time is 60000 ms is selected, and the variation pattern designation command “E6H” “08H” corresponding to the variation pattern 8 is generated at the beginning of the variation of the special symbol. The change content of the change pattern 8 is, for example, a loss effect accompanied by the reach A.
Similarly, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "0" to "2", and the random number for reach determination is "80" to "99", and the random number for special figure variation is "70" to "99". If it is “,” the fluctuation pattern 9 in which the fluctuation time is 90000 ms is selected, and the fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H” “09H” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 9 is generated when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. The change content of the change pattern 9 is, for example, a loss effect accompanied by the reach B.

Next, if the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is "3" and the reach determination random number is "0" to "89", the special figure variation random number "0" to "99" Regardless of the variation pattern 10 is selected. Then, at the start of variation of the special symbol, a variation pattern specification command “E6H” “0AH” corresponding to the variation pattern 10 is generated. The variation content of the variation pattern 10 is, for example, a shortening variation A.
On the other hand, if the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is "3" and the reach determination random number is "90" to "99", and the special figure variation random number is "0" to "69", The above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 8 is selected, and if the special figure fluctuation random number value is “70” to “99”, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 9 is selected. The variation pattern designation command and the variation contents corresponding to the variation patterns 8 and 9 are as described above.

Next, when the random number for special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 is lost (stop symbol data "00" of special symbol) and the gaming state is the short time gaming state, the holding ball for the first special symbol is stored. If the number is “0” “1” and the reach determination random number value is “0” to “84”, the above variation pattern 7 is selected regardless of the special figure variation random number values “0” to “99”. Do. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the fluctuation contents corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 7 are as described above.
On the other hand, the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is "0", "1", and the random number for reach determination is "85" to "99", and the random number for special figure variation is "0" to "69". If it exists, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 8 is selected, and if the special figure fluctuation random number value is “70” to “99”, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 9 is selected. The variation pattern designation command and the variation contents corresponding to the variation patterns 8 and 9 are as described above.

Next, if the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "2""3" and the reach determination random number is "0" to "94", the special figure variation random number "0" to " The fluctuation pattern 11 in which the fluctuation time is 3000 ms is selected regardless of “99”. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command "E6H""0BH" corresponding to the variation pattern 11 is generated. The content of the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern 11 is, for example, a shortening fluctuation B.
On the other hand, if the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "3" and the reach determination random number value is "95" to "99" and the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "69", The variation pattern 8 described above is selected, and if the random number value for special figure variation is “70” to “99”, the variation pattern 9 described above is selected. The variation pattern designation command and the variation contents corresponding to the variation patterns 8 and 9 are as described above.

Next, the variation pattern of the special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 will be described.
In the variation pattern determination table for the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 13, it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 is “7” or “317” and the jackpot is won, and the type of special symbol Is the second special symbol 1 (special symbol stop symbol data “07”), if the special figure variation random number value is “0” to “29”, select the variation pattern 1 described above, and select the special figure If the fluctuation random number is “30” to “99”, the fluctuation pattern 2 described above is selected. The fluctuation pattern designating command and fluctuation contents corresponding to the fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 are the same as the fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 of the first special symbol display device 20 described above except that the MODE of the fluctuation pattern designating command is "E7H". The same as the corresponding fluctuation pattern designation command and fluctuation contents.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol 2 (stop symbol data "08" of the special symbol), The variation pattern 3 described above is selected regardless of the special figure variation random number values “0” to “99”. The fluctuation pattern designation command and fluctuation contents corresponding to fluctuation pattern 3 are fluctuation corresponding to fluctuation pattern 3 of the above first special symbol display device 20 except that MODE of the fluctuation pattern designation command is "E7H". Same as pattern specification command and change contents.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 has won the big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol 3 (stop symbol data "09" of the special symbol), As in the case of the second special symbol 1, if the special figure variation random number value is “0” to “29”, the variation pattern 1 described above is selected, and the special figure variation random number value is “30” to “99”. If it is, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 2 is selected.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 is won in a small hit, that is, when the stop symbol data "13" "14" of the special symbol, for special figure variation The variation pattern 6 described above is selected regardless of the random number values “0” to “99”. The fluctuation pattern specification command and fluctuation contents corresponding to fluctuation pattern 6 are the fluctuation pattern specification of fluctuation pattern 6 of the first special symbol display device 20 described above except that MODE of the fluctuation pattern specification command is "E7H". Same as command and variable content.

  In addition, when the random number for special symbol judgment in the second special symbol display device 21 is lost (stop symbol data "00" of special symbol), the MODE of the variation pattern designation command is "E7H" except that (1) The special symbol determination random number value in the special symbol display device 20 is the same as in the case of losing, so the description will be omitted.

<Variation pattern determination table for probability variation gaming state>
Next, the configuration of the variation pattern determination table for the probability variation gaming state shown in FIG. 14 will be described.
As described above, in the fluctuation pattern determination table, since the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol of the first special symbol display device 20 and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 are provided, first, The variation pattern of the special symbol of the special symbol display device 20 will be described.

  In the variation pattern determination table for the probability variation gaming state shown in FIG. 14, the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 is “7” “37” “67” “97” “97” “127” “157” “187 "217" "247" "277" "317" "337" "367" "427" "457" "457" "487" "517" "547" "577" is determined to have won the jackpot, it is special When the type of symbol is the first special symbol 1 (stop symbol data "01"), if the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "29", the variation pattern 21 having a variation time of 40000 ms is selected. . Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designating command "E6H" "21H" corresponding to the variation pattern 21 is generated as the information of the special symbol. The change content of the change pattern 21 is, for example, a hit effect accompanied by the reach C.

  In addition, it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 1 (stop symbol data "01"), the special figure fluctuation If the random number value is "30" to "99", the fluctuation pattern 22 having a fluctuation time of 80000 ms is selected. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern specification command “E6H” “22H” corresponding to the variation pattern 22 is generated. The change content of the change pattern 22 is, for example, a hit effect accompanied by the reach D.

  In addition, it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won the big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 2, 3 (stop symbol data "02" "03") For example, regardless of the special figure variation random number values “0” to “99”, the variation pattern 23 having a variation time of 75000 ms is selected. Then, at the start of variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern specification command “E6H” “23H” corresponding to the variation pattern 23 is generated. The contents of fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern 23 are, for example, the above-described symbol turning effect.

  In addition, it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 4 or the first special symbol 5 (stop symbol data "04" "05 If it is “), the variation pattern 24 or the variation pattern 25 having a variation time of 60000 ms is selected regardless of the special figure variation random number values“ 0 ”to“ 99 ”. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command “E6H” “24H” or “E6H” “25H” corresponding to the variation pattern 24 or the variation pattern 25 is generated. The content of the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern 24 or 25 is, for example, the above-mentioned chance presentation.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 6 (stop symbol data "06"), the above first As in the special symbol 1, if the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "29", the variation pattern 21 described above is selected, and the special figure variation random number value is "30" to "99". , Select the fluctuation pattern 22 described above. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the fluctuation contents corresponding to the fluctuation patterns 21 and 22 are as described above.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 is won in a small hit, ie, when the stop symbol data "11" "12" of the special symbol, special figure variation for disturbance The fluctuation pattern 26 having a fluctuation time of 60000 ms is selected regardless of the numerical values “0” to “99”. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designating command "E6H" "26H" corresponding to the variation pattern 26 is generated. The content of the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern 26 is, for example, the same chance effect as the fluctuation patterns 24 and 25 described above.

Next, the case where the random number value for special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 is a loss other than the above-mentioned big hit or small hit will be described.
When the special symbol determination random number value is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the gaming state, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure variation random number value.
Specifically, when the random number for special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 is lost (stop symbol data "00") and the gaming state is the non-time-short gaming state, the first special symbol is suspended. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the number of balls, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure variation random number value.
Specifically, if the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is “0” to “2” and the reach determination random number is “0” to “79”, the special figure variation random number “0”. The variation pattern 27 in which the variation time is 10000 ms is selected regardless of “to 99”. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command “E6H” “27H” corresponding to the variation pattern 27 is generated. The contents of change of the change pattern 27 are, for example, normal change.

On the other hand, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "0" to "2", the reach determination random number value is "80" to "99", and the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "69" In this case, the fluctuation pattern 28 in which the fluctuation time is 60000 ms is selected, and if the special drawing fluctuation random value is “70” to “99”, the fluctuation pattern 29 in which the fluctuation time is 90000 ms is selected. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command “E6H” “28H” or “E6H” “29H” corresponding to the variation pattern 28 or the variation pattern 29 is generated.
The change content of the change pattern 28 is, for example, a loss effect with the reach C, and the change content of the change pattern 29 is, for example, a loss effect with the reach D.

Next, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "3" and the reach determination random number is "0" to "89", it is changed to the special figure variation random number "0" to "99". Regardless, the fluctuation pattern 30 in which the fluctuation time is 5000 ms is selected. Then, at the start of variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern specification command “E6H” “30H” corresponding to the variation pattern 30 is generated. The content of the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern 30 is, for example, a shortening fluctuation A.
On the other hand, if the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is "3" and the reach determination random number is "90" to "99", and the special figure variation random number is "0" to "69", The fluctuation pattern 28 described above is selected, and if the random number value for special drawing fluctuation is “70” to “99”, the fluctuation pattern 29 described above is selected. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the fluctuation contents corresponding to the fluctuation patterns 28 and 29 are as described above.

Next, when the random value for special symbol determination in the first special symbol is lost (stop symbol data "00") and the gaming state is the short time gaming state, the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is "0". If the random number value for reach determination is “0” to “84”, the variation pattern 27 described above is selected regardless of the special figure variation random number values “0” to “99”. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the fluctuation contents corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 27 are as described above.
On the other hand, the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is "0", "1", and the random number for reach determination is "85" to "99", and the random number for special figure variation is "0" to "69" If it exists, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 28 is selected, and if the special figure fluctuation random number value is “70” to “99”, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 29 is selected. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the fluctuation contents corresponding to the fluctuation patterns 28 and 29 are as described above.

Next, if the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "2""3" and the reach determination random number is "0" to "94", the special figure variation random number "0" to " Regardless of "99", the fluctuation pattern 31 in which the fluctuation time is 3000 ms is selected. Then, at the start of variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern specification command “E6H” “31H” corresponding to the variation pattern 31 is generated. The content of the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern 31 is, for example, a shortening fluctuation B.
On the other hand, if the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "3" and the reach determination random number value is "95" to "99" and the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "69", The fluctuation pattern 28 described above is selected, and if the random number value for special drawing fluctuation is “70” to “99”, the fluctuation pattern 29 described above is selected. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the fluctuation contents corresponding to the fluctuation patterns 28 and 29 are as described above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol display device 21 will be described.
In the variation pattern determination table for the probability variation gaming state shown in FIG. 14, it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 has been jackpotted, and the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol 1 In addition, if the special figure variation random number value is “0” to “29”, the variation pattern 21 described above is selected, and if the special figure variation random number value is “30” to “99”, the variation described above The pattern 22 is selected. The fluctuation pattern designating command and the fluctuation contents corresponding to the fluctuation patterns 21 and 22 are the fluctuation patterns 21 and 22 of the first special symbol display device 20 described above except that the MODE of the fluctuation pattern designating command is “E7H”. Is the same as the fluctuation pattern designation command and fluctuation content corresponding to.

In addition, it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol 2 (stop symbol data "08"), the special figure change The fluctuation pattern 23 described above is selected regardless of the random number values “0” to “99”. The fluctuation pattern specification command and fluctuation contents corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 23 are fluctuation pattern specification of the fluctuation pattern 23 of the first special symbol display device 20 described above except that the MODE of the fluctuation pattern specification command is "E7H". Same as command and variable content.
In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol 3 (stop symbol data "09"), the above second As in the special symbol 1, if the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "29", the variation pattern 21 described above is selected, and the special figure variation random number value is "30" to "99". , Select the fluctuation pattern 22 described above.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 is won in a small hit, that is, when the stop symbol data "13" "14", the special figure variation random number value The variation pattern 26 described above is selected regardless of “0” to “99”. The fluctuation pattern specification command and fluctuation contents corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 26 are the fluctuation pattern specification of the fluctuation pattern 26 of the first special symbol display device 20 described above except that the MODE of the fluctuation pattern specification command is "E7H". Same as command and variable content.

  In addition, when the random number for special symbol determination in the second special symbol display device 21 is lost (stop symbol data "00"), the first special symbol is displayed except that the MODE of the fluctuation pattern designation command is "E7H". Since the special symbol determination random number value in the device 20 is the same as in the case of the loss, the description is omitted.

<Variation pattern determination table for specific game period after small hit>
Next, the configuration of the variation pattern determination table for the specific gaming period after the small hitting shown in FIG. 15 will be described.
First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol display device 20 will be described.
In the variation pattern determination table for a specific gaming period after a small hit shown in FIG. 15, it is determined that the jackpot was won when the random value for special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 is "7""317". When the special symbol type is the first special symbol 1 and the special figure variation random number value is “0” to “29”, the variation pattern 21 having a variation time of 40000 ms is selected. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command "E6H""21H" as the information of the special symbol is generated. The change content of the change pattern 21 is, for example, a hit effect accompanied by the reach C.
In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 1, the special figure variation random number value is “30” to If "99", the fluctuation pattern 22 having a fluctuation time of 80000 ms is selected. In this case, the variation pattern designation commands "E6H" and "22H" are generated. The change content of the change pattern 22 is, for example, a hit effect accompanied by the reach D.

  In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 2 or 3, regardless of the special figure variation random number value. A fluctuation pattern 23 having a fluctuation time of 60000 ms is set. In this case, variation pattern designation commands "E6H" and "23H" are generated. The fluctuation content of the fluctuation pattern 23 is, for example, a symbol turning effect in which the rendering symbol is expected to be in a reach state with a specific symbol.

  In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 4 or the first special symbol 5, the special figure fluctuation random The fluctuation pattern 24 or the fluctuation pattern 25 having a fluctuation time of 60000 ms is set irrespective of the numerical value, and the fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H" "24H" or "E6H" "25H" is generated at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. The fluctuation content of the fluctuation pattern 24 or 25 is, for example, a chance effect to expect to be a jackpot.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 6, the special symbol is the same as the first special symbol 1 above. If the fluctuation random number value is "0" to "29", the fluctuation pattern 21 described above is set, and if the random number value for special figure fluctuation is "30" to "99", the fluctuation pattern 22 described above is set Do. The fluctuation pattern designation command and fluctuation contents of the fluctuation patterns 21 and 22 are as described above.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 is a small hit, regardless of the special figure variation random number value, set the variation pattern 26 of 60000 ms variation time, special symbol At the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H” “26H” is generated. The contents of fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern 26 are the same chance presentation as the fluctuation patterns 24 and 25.

Next, the case where the random number value for special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 is a loss other than the above-mentioned big hit or small hit will be described.
When the special symbol determination random number value is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the number of holding balls of the first special symbol, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure variation random number value.
Specifically, when the number of holding balls in the first special symbol is "0" to "2" and the reach determination random number is "0" to "79", the special figure variation random number "0" The fluctuation pattern 27 is set such that the fluctuation time is 10000 ms regardless of “to 99”. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command "E6H""27H" is generated. The contents of the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern 27 are usually fluctuation.
On the other hand, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "0" to "2", the reach determination random number value is "80" to "99", and the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "69" In this case, the fluctuation pattern 28 in which the fluctuation time is 60000 ms is set, and in the case where the random number for special drawing fluctuation is “70” to “99”, the fluctuation pattern 29 in which the fluctuation time is 90000 ms is set. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command "E6H", "28H" or "E6H""29H" is generated.
The change content of the change pattern 28 is the loss effect with the reach C, and the change content of the change pattern 29 is the loss effect with the reach D.

Next, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "3" and the reach determination random number is "0" to "89", it is changed to the special figure variation random number "0" to "99". Regardless, the fluctuation pattern 30 is set such that the fluctuation time is 5000 ms. Then, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command "E6H""30H" is generated. The variation content of the variation pattern 30 is the shortening variation A.
On the other hand, when the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is "3", the reach determination random number is "90" to "99", and the special figure variation random number is "0" to "69". The fluctuation pattern 28 described above is set, and when the random number value for special drawing fluctuation is “70” to “99”, the fluctuation pattern 29 described above is set. The fluctuation pattern designation command and fluctuation contents of the fluctuation patterns 28 and 29 are as described above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol display device 21 will be described.
In the variation pattern determination table for a specific period after a small hit shown in FIG. 15, it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 has won a big hit, and the type of special symbol is the second special symbol When the random number value for special figure variation is “0” to “29” when 1, the aforementioned variation pattern 21 is set, and for the special figure variation random number values “30” to “99”, The fluctuation pattern 22 described above is set. The fluctuation pattern designating command and fluctuation contents of fluctuation patterns 21 and 22 are fluctuation of fluctuation patterns 21 and 22 of the first special symbol display device 20 described above except that MODE of the fluctuation pattern designating command is “E7H”. Same as pattern specification command and change contents.

In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol 2, the special figure variation random number value "0" to " The fluctuation pattern 23 described above is set regardless of "99". The fluctuation pattern designation command and fluctuation contents of fluctuation pattern 23 are fluctuation pattern designation commands of fluctuation pattern 23 of first special symbol display device 20 described above except that MODE of fluctuation pattern designation command is “E7H”. It is the same as the content of the change.
In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol 3, like the second special symbol 1, the special figure If the fluctuation random number value is "0" to "29", the fluctuation pattern 21 described above is set, and if the random number value for special figure fluctuation is "30" to "99", the fluctuation pattern 22 described above is set Do.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 is a small hit, the variation pattern 26 described above is set regardless of the special figure variation random number values “0” to “99”. Do. The fluctuation pattern specification command and fluctuation contents of fluctuation pattern 26 are fluctuation pattern specification commands of fluctuation pattern 26 of first special symbol display device 20 described above except that MODE of fluctuation pattern specification command is "E7H" and It is the same as the content of the change.

  In addition, when the random number for special symbol determination in the second special symbol display device 21 is lost, for the special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 except that the MODE of the variation pattern designation command is “E7H”. Since the random number value is the same as in the case of loss, the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal gaming state (for the low probability gaming state) shown in FIG. 13 and the fluctuation pattern determination table for the high probability gaming state shown in FIG. Even so, different variation patterns are configured to be determined. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish between the variation pattern determined to be in the high probability gaming state or the variation pattern determined to be the low probability gaming state depending on the type of variation pattern.

Similarly, a variation pattern determination table for a normal gaming state (for low probability gaming state) shown in FIG. 13 and a variation pattern determination table for a specific gaming period (for low probability gaming state) after a small hit shown in FIG. In this case, even if the same random value or the like is referred to, different fluctuation patterns are determined.
Therefore, depending on the type of fluctuation pattern, it is possible to distinguish whether it is a normal gaming state or a specific gaming period after a small hit. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table for the high probability gaming state shown in FIG. 14 and the variation pattern determination table for the specific gaming period (for low probability gaming state) after the small hitting shown in FIG. The pattern is configured to be determinable. Therefore, it becomes impossible to distinguish whether it is a low probability gaming state or a high probability gaming state depending on the type of fluctuation pattern.

  Furthermore, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 to FIG. 15, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to be short when the gaming state is the short time gaming state when the judgment result of the big hit is a loss . For example, in the case of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13, when the determination result of the big hit is a loss, when the number of holding balls is “2” or “3”, the time determination gaming state is based on the reach determination random number. The fluctuation pattern 11 (shortened fluctuation B) with a fluctuation time of 3000 ms is set with a probability of 95%, but in the non-time-short game state, the fluctuation pattern 10 (shortened fluctuation A) of 5000 ms exceeds 3000 ms. Be done. As described above, the variation time is set to be short when the time-saving gaming state is reached.

  Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, when the number of holding balls is small, the reach is more easily reached than when the number of holding balls is large. For example, in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13, in the non-time-saving game state, the probability that a reach will occur if the determination result of the first special symbol is a loss, the number of holding balls is “0” to “0” In contrast to 20% in the case of 2 ", it is set to 10% when the number of holding balls is" 3 ".

  With this configuration, when the number of holding balls is small, the reach is more likely to be reached. Therefore, when the number of holding balls is small, for example, the ratio of selection of fluctuation patterns 8 and 9 of fluctuation time is higher. Therefore, if the player continues to play during the reach period, the possibility of new holding balls becoming high during the reach period becomes high, and the player's willingness to play the game by stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol. It can be prevented from being damaged.

<Normal electric part and item operation mode determination table>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a table of determining the mode of operation of the ordinary motor-operated part, and FIG. 16 (a) is a table referred to in the non-time-short game state, and FIG. Table.
Specifically, based on the long opening TBL1, if the long opening symbol is determined by the drawing of the normal symbol caused by the passage of the gaming ball to the gate 15, the long opening symbol is determined and the gaming state is the non short time playing state. As a result, the start port opening and closing solenoid 14c is energized. According to the long opening TBL1, the second starting port 14 is opened twice, and the total opening time is controlled to 4.200 seconds.
Also, when the short opening symbol is determined in the non-time-short game state, the starting opening opening / closing solenoid 14c is energized based on the short opening TBL1. According to the short opening TBL1, the second starting port 14 is opened once, and the total opening time is controlled to 0.200 seconds.

On the other hand, when the long opening symbol is determined, if the gaming state is the short time gaming state, the starting opening opening / closing solenoid 14c is energized based on the long opening TBL2. According to the long opening TBL2, the second starting port 14 is opened once, and the total opening time is controlled to 5.000 seconds.
Further, when the short opening symbol is determined in the short time gaming state, the starting opening opening / closing solenoid 14c is energized based on the short opening TBL2. According to the short opening TBL2, the second starting port 14 is opened once, and the total opening time is controlled to 3.000 seconds.

FIG. 17 is a time chart showing the energization timing of the start port opening / closing solenoid 14c for each table.
As shown in FIG. 17 (a), when the second start port 14 is controlled with reference to the long opening TBL1, the second start port 14 is first opened for 0.2 seconds and then goes through a closed state for 4 seconds. , Open again for 4 seconds.
Further, as shown in FIG. 17B, when the second start port 14 is controlled with reference to the long opening TBL2, the second start port 14 is opened for 5.0 seconds.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17 (c), when the second start port 14 is controlled with reference to the short open TBL1, the second start port 14 is opened only for 0.2 seconds, as shown in FIG. As shown in (d), when the second start port 14 is controlled with reference to the short opening TBL2, the second start port 14 is opened for 3.0 seconds.

<Pre-judgment table of special symbol>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a prior determination table for determining in advance the result of the jackpot lottery.
The prior determination table shown in FIG. 18 includes the type of the special symbol display device (the type of start opening detection switch that detects that the game ball has won the start opening), the special symbol determination random number value, the jackpot symbol random number value, reach Based on the determination random number value and the like, winning information for determining in advance the result of the jackpot lottery is generated. Then, based on the generated winning information, a start winning designation command for determining in advance the result of the jackpot lottery is generated.

  Here, the start winning combination designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the command, and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when “E8H” is MODE data, a start winning designation command corresponding to the game ball having won in the first starting opening 13 is indicated, and when “E9H” is MODE data, the second starting opening 13 is 14 shows a start winning combination designation command corresponding to the game ball winning.

First, the prior determination table of the first special symbol display device 20 will be described.
In the prior symbol determination table for the special symbol shown in FIG. 18, the random symbol value for special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 is determined to be a jackpot of “7” or “317”, and the type of special symbol is the first special symbol 1 (Stop symbol data is "01"), when the gaming state is non-short time gaming state, if the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "29", winning a prize information 1 is set. Then, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 13, a start winning designated command "E8H""01H" is generated.

  In addition, it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 1 and the gaming state is non-short time gaming state, the special figure fluctuation If the random number value for use is "30" to "99", the winning information 2 is set. Then, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 13, the start winning designated command "E8H" "02H" is generated.

  In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 2 and 3 and the gaming state is non-short time gaming state, The winning information 3 is set regardless of the figure variation random numbers “0” to “99”. Then, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 13, the start winning designated command "E8H" "03H" is generated.

  In addition, it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, the type of special symbol is the first special symbol 4 or the first special symbol 5, the gaming state is non-short time gaming state If there is, special information for changing the random number "0"-"99", regardless of winning a prize information 4 or winning information 5 is set, start winning designation command "E8H" "04H" or "E8H" "05H" is generated Do.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the first special symbol display device 20 has won a big hit, the type of the special symbol is the first special symbol 6, and the gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state, the first As in the special symbol 1, if the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "29", the winning information 1 is set, and if the special figure variation random number value is "30" to "99", the prize arrangement is achieved. Set information 2 The start winning designation command of the winning information 1, 2 is as described above.

  Also, when the random number for special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 is determined to be a small hit, and the gaming state is non-time-short gaming state, regardless of the special figure variation random number value "0" to "99" , And the winning information 6 is set to generate a start winning specifying command "E8H" "06H".

Next, the case where the random number value for special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 is a loss other than the above-mentioned big hit or small hit will be described.
When the special symbol determination random number value is a loss and the gaming state is the non-time-short game state, the winning information is determined based on the reach determination random number value and the special figure variation random number value.
Specifically, when the reach determination random number values are "0" to "89", the winning information 7 is set regardless of the special figure variation random number values "0" to "99", and the start winning designation command is specified. Generate "E8H" and "07H".
On the other hand, when the reach determination random number value is "90" to "99" and the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "69", the winning information 8 is set, and the special figure variation random number value is "70". In the case of "-" to "99", the winning information 9 is set. Then, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 13, the start winning designated command "E8H" or "08H" or "E8H" or "09H" is generated.

  In addition, during the time saving game, the random number for special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 is a big hit, small hit, regardless of the case of loss, when the game state is time saving game state, the first starting opening 13 The setting of the prize information corresponding to the game ball having won and the generation of the start prize designation command are not performed.

  As will be described later, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a type of gaming machine that prioritizes symbol variation corresponding to the second special symbol display device 21. In this type of gaming machine, as a result of prior determination of whether or not the random value for special symbol determination in the first special symbol display device 20 in which symbol variation is not prioritized during time saving game is won as a big hit, the target is When the player is notified that the jackpot is a jackpot by a predetermination effect, the player is notified that a jackpot exists in the first special symbol display device 20 in which the symbol variation is not prioritized. The jackpot lottery in the second special symbol display device 21 in a state where the jackpot of the first special symbol display device 20 is kept pending by winning game balls in the second starting opening where the symbol variation is given priority. Can receive. In this case, the irritability of the gaming machine becomes extremely high, which is not appropriate. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the setting of the winning information and the generation of the starting winning designation command corresponding to the game ball having won in the first starting opening 13 which is the non-priority side during the short time game I try not to do it.

Next, the prior determination table of the second special symbol display device 21 will be described.
In the prior symbol determination table for the special symbol shown in FIG. 18, the random symbol value for special symbol determination in the second special symbol display device 21 is determined to be a jackpot of “7” or “317”, and the type of special symbol is the second special symbol 1 If the random number value for special figure variation is “0” to “29”, the winning information 11 is set, and if the special figure variation random number value is “30” to “99”, the prize information 12 Set Then, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 14, a start winning specifying command "E9H""01H" or "E9H""01H" is generated.

In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol 2, the special figure variation random number value "0" to " The winning information 13 is set regardless of "99". Then, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 13, the start winning designated command "E9H""03H" is generated.
In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 has won a big hit, and the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol 3, like the second special symbol 1, the special figure If the random number for variation is “0” to “29”, the winning information 11 is set, and if the random number for special figure variation is “30” to “99”, the winning information 12 is set. Then, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 14, a start winning specifying command "E9H""01H" or "E9H""01H" is generated.

  In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol determination random number value in the second special symbol display device 21 is a small hit, winning information 14 is set regardless of the special figure variation random number values "0" to "99". Then, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 14, the start winning designated command "E9H" "04H" is generated.

Next, the case where the random number for special symbol determination in the second special symbol display device 21 is a loss other than the above-mentioned big hit or small hit will be described.
If the random number for special symbol determination is lost, and the gaming state is non-short time game state, and the random number for reach determination is “0” to “89”, the special figure variation random number “0” to “99” The winning combination information 15 is set regardless of and the start winning combination designation command "E9H""05H" is generated.
On the other hand, the special symbol determination random number value is a loss, the gaming state is non-short time gaming state, the reach determination random number value is "90" to "99", the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "69" In the case, the winning information 16 is set, and the winning information 17 is set when the random number value for special figure variation is “70” to “99”. Then, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 14, a start winning designated command "E9H""06H" or "E9H""07H" is generated.

In addition, when the random number value for special symbol determination is a loss, and the gaming state is a short time gaming state, and the random number value for reach determination is “0” to “94”, the special figure variation random number values “0” to “99 The winning combination information 15 is set regardless of “”, and the start winning combination designation command “E9H” “05H” is generated.
Also, the special symbol determination random number value is a loss, the gaming state is a short time gaming state, the reach determination random number value is "90" to "99", and the special figure variation random number value is "0" to "69". In the case, the winning information 16 is set, and the winning information 17 is set when the special figure variation random number value is “70” to “99”. Then, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 14, a start winning designated command "E9H""06H" or "E9H""07H" is generated.

As described above, in the special symbol pre-judging table, whether it is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is determined by the random value for special symbol determination, and "long per unit", "per development", by the random value for big hit. It is determined whether the type of special game "short hit" or "whether to shift to the high probability gaming state".
Furthermore, since "the presence or absence of the occurrence of reach" is determined by the random number value for reach determination, the type of the jackpot and the presence or absence of the reach can be determined before the start of variation of the special symbol by the DATA data of the start winning designation command. It becomes. For example, in the case of the start winning designation command of “E8H” and “01H” of the winning information 1, it is possible to determine information of the first starting opening win and the probability variation long winning. In addition, in the case of the jackpot, since "reach" is always accompanied, it can also be determined that the reach occurs due to the jackpot.

  The prior determination table shown in FIG. 18 is similar to the variation pattern determination table for the normal gaming state shown in FIG. However, while the prior determination table shown in FIG. 18 is used when winning for the starting opening of the game ball, the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 is different in that it is used at the start of variation of the special symbol. There is. Furthermore, it is different even if it refers to "the number of balls held" or not. For this reason, in the prior determination table shown in FIG. 18, the types of the jackpot and the reach can be determined, but it is impossible to distinguish between the “normal fluctuation” and the “shortened fluctuation”.

<Description of gaming state>
Next, the gaming state when the game proceeds will be described.
In the present embodiment, the game proceeds in any one of the "low probability gaming state", "high probability gaming state", "time saving gaming state" and "non time saving gaming state".
However, while the game is in progress, if the gaming state is "low probability gaming state" or "high probability gaming state", it is always "time saving gaming state" or "non time saving gaming state". That is, it is a "low probability gaming state" and a "time saving gaming state", a "low probability gaming state" and a "non time saving gaming state", and a "high probability gaming state", There will be cases of "time saving gaming state" and cases of "high probability gaming state" and "non time saving gaming state". Furthermore, in the case of the "low probability gaming state" and the "non-short time gaming state", there are times when it is a specific gaming period after the small hitting ends and when it is not a specific playing period after the small hitting ends. In the case of the "low probability gaming state" and the "non-short time gaming state", the time when it is not the specific gaming period after the small hitting end will be referred to as the "normal gaming state".

  In the present embodiment, the “low probability gaming state” means that the jackpot probability is 1/1 in the jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 13 or the second starting opening 14. The game state set to 299.5. Here, the jackpot winning is to obtain the right to execute the "long game" or the "short game" described later.

  On the other hand, "high probability game state" means a game state in which the jackpot probability of the jackpot is set to 1 / 29.95. Therefore, in the "high probability gaming state", it is easier to obtain the right to execute the "long playing game" or the "short hitting gaming" than the "low probability gaming state".

In the present embodiment, "non-time-saving gaming state" means that the time required for the lottery is set to 10 seconds in the lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 15, and long opening A game in which the total opening time of the second starting opening 14 when the symbol is determined is set to 4.2 seconds, and the total opening time of the second starting opening 14 when the short opening symbol is determined is set to 0.2 seconds I say the state.
On the other hand, "time saving game state" means that the time required for the lottery is set to one second in the regular symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes through the gate 15, and the long opening symbol The total opening time of the second starting opening 14 when the is determined is 5 seconds, and the total opening time of the second starting opening 14 when the short opening symbol is determined is 3 seconds.

  Further, in the "time saving gaming state", the probability of winning a hit in the lottery of the normal symbol is higher than in the "non-time saving gaming state". Therefore, in the "time saving gaming state", the second starting opening 14 is more easily controlled to the second mode as long as the gaming ball passes the gate 15 than the "non-time saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", it is possible for the player to proceed with the game without consuming the gaming balls, and the gaming efficiency can be greatly enhanced as compared with the non-time-saving gaming state.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the percentage of winning a jackpot which is more advantageous to the player when the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 14 than when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 13 Since it is high, it is easy to win a jackpot which is advantageous to the player during the short game during the regular game.
In addition, the probability of winning a winning in the lottery of the normal symbol may be set so as not to change in any of the "non-time saving gaming state" and the "time saving gaming state".

  In the present embodiment, the “specific game period after the end of the small hit” is a variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 5) which can determine the same effect as the high probability gaming state in order to have an expectation of being in the high probability gaming state. 15) refers to the game period to which reference is made.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart.
<Main processing of main control board>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating main processing by the main control board.
When power is supplied from the power supply substrate 170, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 111, and the main CPU 111 performs the following main processing.
First, in step S10, the main CPU 111 performs initialization processing. In this process, the main CPU 111 reads an activation program from the main ROM 112 and initializes a flag and the like stored in the main RAM 113.

In step S20, the main CPU 111 performs game random number updating processing for updating the variation pattern random number value and the reach determination random number value.
In step S30, the main CPU 111 updates the special symbol determination initial value random number, the big hit symbol initial value random number, and the small hit symbol initial value random number.
After that, the main CPU 111 repeatedly performs the processing of step S20 and step S30 until predetermined interrupt processing is performed.
(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)

<Timer interrupt processing of main control board>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing by the main control board.
The clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds, hereinafter referred to as "4 ms"), whereby timer interrupt processing described below is performed. To be executed.
First, in step S101, the main CPU 111 saves the information stored in the register in the stack area.
Next, in step S102, the main CPU 111 updates the special symbol time counter, updates the special gaming timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric role, updates the normal symbol time counter, updates the general public open time counter It performs time control processing to update various timer counters such as processing.
Specifically, the main CPU 111 performs processing of subtracting 1 from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, and the general charge open time counter.

In step S103, the main CPU 111 performs random number update processing of the special symbol determination random number value, the large hit symbol random number value, the small hit symbol random number value, and the hit determination random number value.
Specifically, 1 is added to each random number counter to update the random number counter. When the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter makes one revolution, the random number is updated from the value of the initial value random number at that time.
In step S104, the main CPU 111 performs an initial value random number updating process of updating the random number counter by adding 1 to the special symbol determination initial value random number counter, the big hit symbol initial value random number counter, and the small hit symbol initial value random number counter. .

In step S105, the main CPU 111 performs input control processing.
In this process, the main CPU 111 detects the first start opening detection switch 13a, the second start opening detection switch 14a, the gate detection switch 15a, the first large winning opening detection switch 16a, the second large winning opening detection switch 17a, and the general winning opening detection An input process is performed to determine whether or not each switch of the switch 18a has an input. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24.
At step S106, the main CPU 111 carries out a special figure special power control process for controlling the special symbol and the special motorized role. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 to 32.
At step S107, the main CPU 111 carries out a general-purpose power control control process for controlling the ordinary symbol and the ordinary motorized part. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35.

In step S108, the main CPU 111 performs payout control processing.
In the payout control process, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the game ball has won in the first large winning opening 16, the second large winning opening 17, the first starting opening 13, the second starting opening 14, and the general winning opening 18. A check is made, and when there is a winning, the payout number designation command corresponding to each is sent to the payout control board 130.
More specifically, a general winning opening winning ball counter, a large winning opening winning ball counter, a starting opening winning ball counter (for example, the first starting opening winning ball counter updated in FIG. 21 (step S132 described later)). A check is made, and a payout amount designation command corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 130. After that, predetermined data is subtracted from the winning ball counter corresponding to the sent out number-of-payouts designation command and updated.
In step S109, the main CPU 111 performs data creation processing of external information data, starting opening opening / closing solenoid data, special winning opening opening / closing solenoid data, special symbol display device data, normal symbol display device data, and storage number designation command.

In step S110, the main CPU 111 performs output control processing.
In this output control processing, the main CPU 111 performs port output processing for outputting the signals of the external information data, starting opening / closing solenoid data, and special winning opening / closing solenoid data created in step S109.

Also, the main CPU 111 makes the special symbol display device data and the ordinary symbol created in the above step S109 in order to light the respective LEDs of the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21 and the normal symbol display device 22. A display device output process of outputting the display device data is performed. Furthermore, the main CPU 111 also performs command transmission processing for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 113.
In step S111, the main CPU 111 restores the information saved in step S101 to the register of the main CPU 111.

<Input control processing>
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating input control processing by the main control board.
First, in step S121, the main CPU 111 determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 18a, that is, whether or not the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening 18. When the main CPU 111 receives a detection signal from the general winning opening detection switch 18a, the main CPU 111 adds predetermined data to a general winning opening prize ball counter used for a winning ball and updates the same.

In step S122, the main CPU 111 inputs a detection signal from the first large winning opening detection switch 16a or the second large winning opening detection switch 17a, that is, the gaming ball is the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning combination It is determined whether or not the ball 17 has entered the ball.
When the main CPU 111 receives a detection signal from the first large winning opening detection switch 16a, the main CPU 111 adds predetermined data to the large winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball and updates the first large winning prize. Add the counter of the 1st large winning a prize entrance ball counter (C1) and the 2nd large winning a prize entrance ball counter (C2) storage area for counting the game balls that have won in the mouth 16 and the 2nd big winning hole 17 Update.

  In step S123, the main CPU 111 determines whether the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 13a is input, that is, determines whether the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 13, and determines the big hit. Set predetermined data to be performed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S124, the main CPU 111 determines whether the detection signal from the second starting opening detection switch 14a has been input, that is, whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 14.
When the main CPU 111 receives a detection signal from the second starting opening detection switch 14a, the main CPU 111 performs the same process as step S123.
However, in this second starting opening detection switch input process, "1" is added to the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, and the extracted special symbol determination random value, jackpot random number, small hit The symbol random number value and the reach determination random number value are stored in the second special symbol storage area. That is, in the first starting opening detection switch input processing and the second starting opening detection switch input processing, only the storage area for storing various data is different, and the other processing is the same.

  In step S125, the main CPU 111 determines whether the gate detection switch 15a has input a signal, that is, whether or not the gaming ball has passed the normal symbol gate 15. The gate detection switch input process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<First start port detection switch input processing>
FIG. 22 is a flow chart for explaining a first starting opening detection switch input process by the main control board.
First, in step S131, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 13a is input.
When the detection signal from the first start opening detection switch 13a is input (Yes in step S131), the process proceeds to step S132, and when the detection signal from the first start opening detection switch 13a is not input (No in step S131), the first start opening detection switch input process is ended.
In step S132, the main CPU 111 performs a process of adding predetermined data to a starting mouth winning ball counter used for a winning ball and updating it.

Next, in step S133, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the number of holdings set in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is less than four. If the number of pending items set in the first special symbol pending number (U1) storage area is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S134 and is set in the first special symbol pending number (U1) storage area If the number of pending holdings is not less than 4, the first start port detection switch input process is ended.
In step S134, the main CPU 111 adds “1” to the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area and stores it.

In step S135, the main CPU 111 acquires a special symbol determination random number value, sequentially searches for a free storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and stores the free storage unit in the free storage unit. The acquired special symbol determination random number value is stored.
In step S136, the main CPU 111 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value, sequentially searches the vacant storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and acquires it in the vacant storage unit. Store the jackpot symbol random number value.

In step S137, the main CPU 111 acquires a small hit symbol random number value, sequentially searches for a vacant storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area, and stores the vacant storage unit. The acquired small hit symbol random number values are stored.
In step S138, the main CPU 111 acquires game random number values (random number values for variation patterns and random numbers for reach determination), and sequentially stores empty storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol storage area. A search is made, and the acquired game random number values (random pattern value for variation pattern and random number value for reach determination) are stored in a vacant storage unit.

  In step S139, the main CPU 111 performs predetermination processing (FIG. 19) for determining each random number value acquired in steps S135 to S138 based on the prior determination table corresponding to the current gaming state.

<Pre-judgment processing>
FIG. 23 is a flow chart for explaining the prior determination process by the main control board.
First, in step S151, the main CPU 111 determines the special symbol determination random number value newly written in the special symbol storage area based on the prior determination table shown in FIG.

Next, in step S152, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it has been tentatively determined to be a jackpot as a result of the jackpot determination in step S151.
If the main CPU 111 determines that the jackpot is tentatively determined (Yes in step S152), the main CPU 111 shifts the processing to step S153. If the jackpot is not tentatively determined (No in step S152), the main CPU 111 shifts the processing to step S155.
When it is provisionally determined that the jackpot is large in step S152, the main CPU 111 determines the newly written jackpot symbol random number value in step S153 to temporarily determine the type of special symbol (stop symbol data).

Next, in step S154, the main CPU 111 generates a start winning designation command corresponding to the temporarily determined special symbol type, sets it in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the prior determination processing.
The start winning combination designation command is provided to be distinguishable in the same manner as the fluctuation pattern designation command shown in FIG. 9 to FIG. 11, and each information of a large hit, a small hit, and a lost is associated.

  In step S152, when it is not tentatively determined to be a big hit (No in step S152), the main CPU 111 makes a tentative decision whether or not it is determined to be a small hit in step S155.

  When it is not provisionally determined to be a small hit in step S155 (No in step S155), in step S157, the main CPU 111 sets a start winning designation command indicating a loss in the transmission data storage area for effect. End the pre-judging process.

  On the other hand, when it is provisionally determined to be a small hit (Yes in step S155), the main CPU 111 transmits a start winning designation command indicating that it is a small hit, that is, a chance effect in step S156. It is set in the storage area and the predetermination processing is ended.

  Also in the second starting opening detection switch input process shown in step S 124 (FIG. 17), the main CPU 111 refers to the prior determination table to generate winning information, and effects control of the starting winning designation command based on the winning information. A predetermination process of transmitting to the substrate 120 is performed.

By the above-described predetermination process, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 13 or the second starting opening 14, the winning information can be transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a starting winning designation command.
Therefore, the sub CPU 121 of the effect control board 120 having received the start winning designation command analyzes the start winning command, and the variation of the special symbol triggered by the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening this time is started From the front, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect in advance.
However, this prior determination process is determined in accordance with the gaming state at the time when the gaming ball enters each starting opening 13, 14. Therefore, when the gaming state is changed before processing the first hold or the second hold held by the ball entry, the result of the jackpot determination process described later may be different from the result of the prior determination process. There is.

<Gate detection switch input processing>
FIG. 24 is a flowchart for explaining gate detection switch input processing by the main control board.
First, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 15a is input in step S171.

In step S171, when it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection switch 15a is input (Yes in step S171), the main CPU 111 determines whether the number of normal symbol holdings (G) is less than 4 in step S172. Do.
When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 15a is not input (No in step S171), the main CPU 111 ends the gate detection switch input processing.
In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes the normal symbol gate 15, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, but the upper limit reserved number of the right of the variable display of the normal symbol is set to "4".

If it is determined in step S172 that the normal symbol holding number (G) is less than 4 (Yes in step S172), the main CPU 111 is stored in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area in step S173 A value obtained by adding “1” to the normal symbol holding number (G) is stored as a new normal symbol holding number (G).
When it is determined in step S172 that the normal symbol holding number (G) is not less than 4 (is 4) (No in step S172), the gate detection switch input processing is ended.

Next, in step S174, main CPU 111 extracts one random number for collision determination from the random number range (for example, 0 to 19) prepared in advance, and stores the extracted random number in the normal symbol storage area .
Next, in step S175, the main CPU 111 extracts one random number for symbol determination from the random number range (for example, 0 to 10) prepared in advance, and stores the extracted random number in the normal symbol storage area. Then, the gate detection switch input processing is completed.

<Special figure special power control process>
FIG. 25 is a flow chart for explaining the special figure charge control process by the main control board.
First, in step S181, the main CPU 111 loads the value of the special figure special power process data and refers to the branch address from the special figure special power process data loaded in step S182.

If the special figure special power processing data = 0 in step S183 (Yes in step S183), the main CPU 111 shifts the processing to special symbol storage determination processing (step S184).
When the special figure special power process data = 0 is not satisfied in step S183 (No in step S183), the main CPU 111 determines whether the special figure special power process data = 1 is satisfied in step S185.
If the special figure special power processing data = 1 in step S185 (Yes in step S185), the main CPU 111 shifts the processing to special symbol variation processing (step S186).

When special figure special power process data = 1 is not satisfied in step S185 (No in step S185), the main CPU 111 determines whether special figure special power process data = 2 in step S187.
If the special figure special power processing data = 2 in step S187 (Yes in step S187), the main CPU 111 shifts the processing to special symbol stop processing (step S188).
When the special figure special power process data = 2 is not satisfied in step S187 (No in step S187), the main CPU 111 determines whether the special figure special power process data = 3 is satisfied in step S189.

If special image special power processing data = 3 in step S189 (Yes in step S189), the main CPU 111 shifts the processing to the jackpot game processing (step S190).
When the special figure special power process data = 3 is not satisfied in step S189 (No in step S189), the main CPU 111 determines whether the special figure special power process data = 4 is satisfied in step S191.
If the special figure special power processing data = 4 in step S191 (Yes in step S191), the main CPU 111 shifts the processing to the small hitting game processing (step S192).
When the special figure special power process data = 4 is not satisfied in step S191 (No in step S191), the main CPU 111 determines that the special figure special power process data = 5, and shifts the process to special game end process (step S193).

<Special symbol memory judgment processing>
FIG. 26 is a flowchart for explaining special symbol storage determination processing by the main control board.
In step S201, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the special symbol is being changed and displayed. Here, during the variation display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol time counter ≠ 0 (Yes in step S201), the special symbol storage determination processing is ended.
Further, if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, that is, if the special symbol time counter = 0 (No in step S201), the main CPU 111 shifts the processing to step S202, and holds the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area It is determined whether is 1 or more.

If the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area is not 1 or more (No at step S202), the CPU 111 shifts the processing to step S204, and the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area is "1". If it is determined that the above is true, the process proceeds to step S203.
Thereby, the second special symbol storage area is processed with priority over the first special symbol storage area.
In step S203, the main CPU 111 subtracts “1” from the value stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area and stores it.

In step S204, the main CPU 111 determines whether the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is one or more. If the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is not 1 or more (No in step S204), the process proceeds to step S215, the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is "1" or more If it is determined (Yes in step S204), the process proceeds to step S205.
In step S205, the main CPU 111 subtracts “1” from the value stored in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area and stores it.

  In step S206, the main CPU 111 determines a predetermined random number value (special symbol determination random number value stored in the special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the special symbol holding number (U) storage area subtracted in the above steps S202 to S205. A big hit symbol random number value, a small hit symbol random number value, a reach determination random number value, and a variation pattern random number value) and shift processing of the start winning combination designation command are performed. Specifically, the predetermined random number value stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol storage area or the second special symbol storage area and the start winning combination designation command are stored one before the other Shift to

  Here, the predetermined random number value stored in the first storage unit and the start winning combination designation command are shifted to the determination storage area (the zeroth storage unit). At this time, the predetermined random number value stored in the first storage unit and the start winning combination designation command are written in the determination storage area (the zeroth storage unit) and are already written in the determination storage area (the zeroth storage unit). The stored data will be deleted from the special symbol storage area. As a result, the predetermined random number and the start winning combination designation command used in the previous game are erased. Further, after the shift, MODE of the start winning combination designation command is processed so as to correspond to the storage area after the shift.

  In step S207, the main CPU 111 writes the data (the special symbol determination random number value, the big hit random number value, and the small hit symbol) written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol hold storage area in step S206. The jackpot determination process is executed based on the random number value). The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S208, the main CPU 111 performs fluctuation pattern determination processing.
The variation pattern determination process first refers to the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 113 to determine a variation pattern determination table based on the current gaming state. Specifically, in the case of the high probability gaming state, the variation pattern determination table for the high probability gaming state shown in FIG. 14 is determined, and in the case of the low probability gaming state, the number of specified periods (T) = 0 Determine the fluctuation pattern determination table of the normal gaming state (for low probability gaming state) shown in FIG. 13, when the number of specific periods (T)> 0 in the low probability gaming state, after a small hit shown in FIG. The variation pattern determination table for the specific gaming period of (for low probability gaming state) is determined.
Thereafter, the variation pattern is determined based on the determined variation pattern determination table with reference to the special symbol determination random number value, the jackpot symbol random number value, the reach determination random number value, and the variation pattern random number value.

In step S209, the main CPU 111 sets a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area.
In step S210, the main CPU 111 confirms the gaming state at the start of variation, and sets a gaming state designating command corresponding to the current gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S211, the main CPU 111 starts variable symbol display of the special symbol in the special symbol display devices 20 and 21. That is, the variation display data of the special symbol is set in the processing area. Thereby, when the information written in the processing area relates to the first hold (U1), the first special symbol display device 20 is blinked, and when the second hold (U2) is concerned, the second special symbol display The device 21 will blink.

In step S212, when the main CPU 111 starts the variation display of the special symbol as described above, the variation time (counter value) based on the variation pattern determined in the above step S208 is added to the special symbol time counter. set. The special symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in S110.
In step S213, the main CPU 111 sets 00H to the customer waiting determination flag. That is, the customer waiting determination flag is cleared. It should be noted that the customer waiting determination flag = "00H" indicates that the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner, or a special game is currently being performed. On the other hand, the customer waiting determination flag "01H" is stored when the special symbol is not displayed during the variation display or when the special game is not performed. When the customer waiting determination flag = "01H" is stored, a customer waiting command is set in step S217 described later, and it is transmitted that the special control of the variation display or the special game is not performed on the effect control board 120.

In step S214, the main CPU 111 sets special figure special power process data = 1, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.
If it is determined in step S204 that the first hold (U1) is "0", that is, if neither the first hold (U1) nor the second hold (U2) is held, the main CPU 111 In step S215, it is determined whether 01H is set in the customer waiting determination flag.

If 01H is set in the customer waiting determination flag (Yes in step S215), the special symbol storage determination processing is ended, and if 01H is not set in the customer waiting determination flag (No in step S215) , And moves the process to step S216.
In step S216, the main CPU 111 sets 01H in the customer waiting determination flag so that the customer waiting command is not set many times in step S217 described later.
In step S217, the main CPU 111 sets a customer waiting command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

<Big hit judgment processing>
FIG. 27 is a flow chart for explaining the jackpot determination process by the main control board.
First, in step S221, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the high probability game flag is turned on in the high probability game flag storage area. The high probability game flag is turned on when the current gaming state is the high probability gaming state. If the high probability game flag is on, the process proceeds to step S222. If the high probability game flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S223.

If it is determined in step S221 that the high probability game flag is on, that is, it is determined that the current gaming state is the high probability game state (Yes in step S221), the main CPU 111 selects “high probability time” in step S222. Select "random number judgment table".
If it is determined in step S221 that the high probability game flag is not turned on, that is, the current gaming state is not the high probability gaming state (low probability gaming state) (No in step S221), the main CPU 111 performs step In S223, a "low probability random number determination table" is selected.

In S224, the main CPU 111 selects the special symbol determination random number value written in the determination storage area (0th storage section) of the special symbol storage area in step S206 (FIG. 26) in step S222 or S223. The determination is made based on the “high probability random number determination table” or the “low probability random number determination table”.
More specifically, when the special symbol storage area shifted in step S206 (FIG. 26) is the first special symbol storage area, the big hit for the first special symbol display device of FIG. 6 (a) When the special symbol storage area shifted in step S206 (FIG. 26) is the second special symbol storage area with reference to the determination table, the jackpot for the second special symbol display device of FIG. 6 (b) Whether "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" is determined based on the special symbol determination random value with reference to the determination table.

In step S225, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it has been determined as a big hit as a result of the big hit determination in the above S224.
If it is determined that the jackpot is determined (Yes in step S225), the process proceeds to step S226. If the jackpot is not determined (Yes in step S225), the process proceeds to step S229.

  In step S226, the main CPU 111 determines the jackpot symbol random number value written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol storage area in step S206 (FIG. 26), and the type of special symbol (stop) The symbol data) is determined, and the determined stop symbol data is set in the stop symbol data storage area, and the jackpot symbol determination processing is performed.

Specifically, when the special symbol storage area shifted in step S206 (FIG. 26) is the first special symbol storage area, the jackpot symbol determination table for the first special symbol display device (FIG. Refer to a), and when the special symbol storage area shifted in step S206 (FIG. 26) is the second special symbol storage area, the jackpot symbol determination table for the second special symbol display device ( 7 (a)), the stop symbol data indicating the type of the special symbol to be stopped is determined based on the jackpot symbol random number value, and the determined stop symbol data is set in the stop symbol data storage area .
In addition, the special symbol determined is used to determine "big hit" or "small hit" in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 29 as described later, and the big hit game processing of FIG. 30 or the small hit of FIG. It is also used to determine the operation mode of the big winning opening in the game processing, and is also used to determine the gaming state after the end of the jackpot in the special game end process of FIG.

In step S227, in order to transmit data corresponding to the special symbol to the effect control board 120, the main CPU 111 generates an effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol for the big hit and sets it in the effect transmission data storage area .
In step S228, the main CPU 111 determines the gaming state at the time of big hit from the information set in the gaming state storage area (time saving game flag storage area, high probability game flag storage area), and indicates the gaming state at the time of big hit The gaming state information is set in the gaming state buffer. Specifically, 00H is set if both the time-short game flag and the high probability game flag are not set, and 01H is set if the time-short game flag is not set but the high probability game flag is set. If the short time game flag is set but the high probability game flag is not set, 02H is set, and if both the short time game flag and the high probability game flag are set, 03H is set.

  Thus, apart from the gaming state storage area (time saving gaming flag storage area, high probability gaming flag storage area), it is decided to set the gaming state at the time of big hit in the gaming state buffer during the big hit game. Since the high probability game flag and the time saving game flag in the state storage area (time saving game flag storage area, high probability game flag storage area) are reset, after the big hit ends, based on the playing state at the time of big hit winning This is because the gaming state storage area can not be referred to when determining the gaming state at the end of the big hit. Thus, by providing the gaming state buffer for storing gaming information indicating the gaming state at the time of big hit separately from the gaming state storage area, by referring to the gaming information in the gaming state buffer after the end of the big hit On the basis of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, it is possible to newly set the gaming state after the jackpot (time saving gaming state, number of times of time saving, etc.).

If the main CPU 111 determines in step S225 that the player does not make a big hit (No in step S225), the main CPU 111 determines whether it is determined to be a small hit in step S229.
If it is determined that the small hit (Yes in step S229), the process proceeds to step S230, and if it is not determined that the small hit (No in step S229), the process proceeds to step S232.
In step S230, the main CPU 111 determines the small hitting symbol random number value written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol suspension storage area in step S206 (FIG. 26) and determines the type of special symbol. The small stop symbol determination process is performed to set the determined stop symbol data in the stop symbol data storage area.

  Specifically, referring to the small hit symbol determination table of FIG. 7 (b), based on the small hit symbol random number value, the stop symbol data indicating the type of the special symbol is determined, and the determined stop symbol data is determined Set in stop symbol data storage area. In the present embodiment, "small hit A" and "small hit B" are provided as types of "small hit". However, the content of the small hitting game executed after that is exactly the same, regardless of which "small hitting" is won, the special symbol display device 20, with "small hitting A" and "small hitting B", Only the special symbol displayed stopped on 21 is different.

In step S231, the main CPU 111 generates the effect design designation command corresponding to the special symbol for small hitting in order to transmit the data corresponding to the special symbol to the effect control board 120, and sets it in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process proceeds to step S228.
In step S232, the main CPU 111 determines a special symbol for lost with reference to the lost symbol determination table of FIG. 7C, and sets the determined stopped symbol data for lost in the stopped symbol data storage area.
In step S233, in order to transmit data corresponding to the special symbol to the effect control board 120, the main CPU 111 generates a effect symbol designating command corresponding to the special symbol for losing, and sets it in the transmission data storage area for effect. End the jackpot determination process.

<Special symbol variation process>
FIG. 28 is a flow chart for explaining special symbol variation processing by the main control board.
In step S241, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the variation time set in step S212 (FIG. 26) has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in step S241), the special symbol fluctuation process is ended.
When it is determined that the time set in step S212 has passed (Yes in step S241), the main CPU 111 performs the above steps in the routine processing (big hit determination processing) before the special symbol variation processing in step S242. The special symbol set in S227, S231 and S233 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21. As a result, the determination result of the jackpot is notified to the player.

In step S243, the main CPU 111 sets a symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area.
In step S244, when the main CPU 111 starts the stop display of the special symbol as described above, the main CPU 111 sets the symbol stop time (0.5 second = 250 counter) in the special symbol time counter. Incidentally, the special symbol time counter is subjected to -1 subtraction processing every 2 ms in the above-mentioned S110.
In step S245, the main CPU 111 sets 2 in the special figure special power process data, and ends the special symbol variation process.

<Special symbol stop processing>
FIG. 29 is a flow chart for explaining special symbol stopping processing by the main control board.
In step S251, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S244 has passed (is it a special symbol time counter = 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the symbol stop time has not elapsed (No in step S251), the special symbol stop process is ended.

In step S252, the main CPU 111 determines whether a flag is turned on in the time saving game flag storage area. When the flag is turned on in the time saving game flag storage area, the current game state is the time saving game state.
If the flag is turned on in the time saving game flag storage area (Yes in step S252), the process proceeds to step S253, and if the flag is turned off in the time saving game flag storage area (No in step S252) , And moves the process to step S254.

In step S253, the main CPU 111 performs a time saving game end determination process.
Specifically, when “1” is subtracted from (J) stored in the time saving game count (J) storage area, it is stored as a new remaining change count (J), and the stored time saving game count (J It is determined whether or not) is "0", and if the time saving game count (J) = 0, the flag stored in the time saving game flag storage area is cleared (OFF). On the other hand, if the time saving game count (J) is not 0, the flag stored in the time saving game flag storage area remains on, and the process moves to step S254.

In step S254, the main CPU 111 determines whether a flag is turned on in the high probability game flag storage area. The case where the flag is turned on in the high probability game flag storage area is the case where the current gaming state is the high probability gaming state.
If the flag is turned on in the high probability game flag storage area (Yes in step S254), the process proceeds to step S255, and if the flag is turned off in the high probability game flag storage area (in step S254) No), the process proceeds to step S256.

  In step S255, the main CPU 111 performs high probability game end determination processing. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from (X) stored in the high probability game count (X) storage area and stored as a new high probability game count (X), and the stored high probability game It is determined whether or not the number of times (X) is "0", and if it is determined that the number of times of high probability gaming is (X) = 0, the flag stored in the high probability gaming flag storage area is cleared (Turn off). On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability game frequency (X) = 0 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S256.

In step S256, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the specific period number counter (T) = 0. If the specific period number counter (T) = 0 (Yes in step S256), the process proceeds to step S258. If the specific period number counter (T) is not 0 (No in step S256), the process moves to step S257.
In step S 257, the main CPU 111 stores an operation value obtained by subtracting “1” from the specific period number counter (T) as a new specific period number counter (T).

In step S258, the main CPU 111 confirms the current gaming state, and sets a gaming state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area.
At step S259, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area is that of the big hit symbol (stop symbol data = 01 to 10). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot symbol (Yes at step S259), the process proceeds to step S263, and if it is not determined that the jackpot symbol (No at step S259), the process proceeds to step S260.

In step S260, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not it is a small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol data storage area is a small hit symbol (stop symbol data = 11 to 14).
Here, when it is determined that it is a small hit symbol (Yes in step S260), the main CPU 111 sets 4 in the special figure special power process data in step S261, and shifts the process to step S265.

If the small hit symbol is not determined (No in step S260), the process proceeds to step S262, 0 is set in the special figure special power process data, and the special symbol stop process is ended.
If it is determined in step S259 that the symbol is a jackpot symbol (Yes in step S259), the main CPU 111 sets 3 in the special-image special-power process data in step S263.

Then, in step S264, the main CPU 111 resets the gaming state and the number of times of time saving. Specifically, the data in the high probability game flag storage area, the high probability game count (X) storage area, the short time game flag storage area, and the short time game count (J) storage area is cleared.
In step S 265, the main CPU 111 determines which of “long”, “short”, and “small” according to the stop symbol data, and transmits the opening command according to these types for presentation Set in the data storage area.

  In step S266, the main CPU 111 determines which of "long", "short" and "small" according to the stop symbol data, and the opening time according to these types is a special game timer Set to the counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110. When the main processing is completed, the main CPU 111 ends the special symbol stop processing.

<Big hit game processing>
FIG. 30 is a flow chart for explaining the jackpot game processing by the main control board.
First, in step S271, the main CPU 111 determines whether the opening is currently in progress. For example, if “0” is stored in the number-of-round-games (R) storage area, it is currently opening, so it is determined whether it is currently opening by referring to the number-of-round-games (R) storage area.
If the main CPU 111 determines that the opening is currently in progress (Yes in step S 271), the processing proceeds to step S 272. If the main CPU 111 determines that the opening is not currently in progress (No in step S 271), the processing in step S 276 is performed. Transfer.

In step S272, the main CPU 111 determines whether a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter set in step S266 (FIG. 29) has become "0". If the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed.
As a result, if the opening time has not passed (No in step S272), the jackpot game processing is ended, and if the opening time has passed (Yes in step S272), the processing is shifted to step S273. .

In step S273, the main CPU 111 performs jackpot start setting processing.
The jackpot start setting process first determines an open mode determination table according to the type of jackpot according to the stop symbol data. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, according to the stop symbol data, one long open pattern determination table for long, two long open pattern determination tables for two long, short open pattern determination table, one open for development per open One of the mode determination table and the release mode determination table for two developments is determined and set. Next, in the round game frequency (R) storage area, “1” is added to the current round game frequency (R) stored and stored.
In the present step S273, nothing is stored in the number-of-round-games (R) storage area. That is, since one round game has not been performed yet, “1” is stored in the number-of-round-games (R) storage area.

  In step S274, the main CPU 111 performs a special winning opening open process. In this big winning opening opening process, the energization start data of the first big winning opening opening and closing solenoid 16c and the second large winning opening opening and closing solenoid 17c are set, and the current round is performed with reference to the table set in step S273. The opening time of the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 is set in the special game timer counter based on the number of times of playing (R) and the number of times of opening (K).

  In step S275, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, the information on the number of round games is transmitted to the effect control board 120, so the number of round games (R The special winning opening open (R) round designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect according to. For example, at the start of the first round game of the jackpot, the number of round games (R) is set to “1” and K = 1, so the special winning opening open one round designation command is transmission data for effect Set in the storage area. On the other hand, when K is not 1, the jackpot gaming process is ended without setting the special winning opening open (R) round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of the round, the special winning opening open (R) round designation command is transmitted only at the start of the round.

In step S 276, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the current ending is in progress. The term "ending" as used herein refers to the processing after all the preset round games have ended.
Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress (Yes in step S276), the process proceeds to step S289. If it is determined that the current ending is not in progress (No in step S276), the process proceeds to step S277. Be

  In step S277, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 are being closed. If it is determined that the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 are closed (Yes in step S277), the process proceeds to step S278, and the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 If it is determined that the closing is not in progress (No in step S277), the process proceeds to step S279.

In step S278, the main CPU 111 determines whether the closing time set in step S280 described later has elapsed. The closing time is also determined based on whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, as in the opening time. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed (No in step S278), the jackpot gaming process is ended.
If the closing time has elapsed (Yes in step S278), the main CPU 111 shifts the processing to step S274.

In step S279, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the “opening completion condition” for ending the opening of the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 is satisfied.
This "opening end condition" is that the value of the first large winning opening entrance ball counter (C1), the second large winning opening entrance ball counter (C2) has reached the maximum number (for example 9), or the maximum opening time The fact that (the special game timer counter = 0) has passed is applicable.
Then, when the main CPU 111 determines that the "opening end condition" is satisfied (Yes in step S279), the process proceeds to step S280, and when the main CPU 111 determines that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the jackpot game processing Finish.

In step S280, the main CPU 111 performs a special winning opening closing process.
In the special winning opening closing process, in order to close the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17, the main CPU 111 stops the energization stop data of the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c and the second large winning opening solenoid 17c. The first big winning opening 16 is set based on the current number of rounds played (R) and the number of times opened (K) with reference to the open mode determination table (see FIG. 11) determined in step S273. , The closing time of the second large winning opening 17 is set to the special game timer counter. As a result, the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 are closed.

In step S281, the main CPU 111 determines whether one round has ended. Specifically, in one round, the number of opening times (K) is the maximum number of opening times, or the value of the first large winning opening entrance ball counter (C1), the value of the second large winning opening entrance ball counter (C2) Since the process ends on the condition that the maximum number (for example, nine) has been reached, it is determined whether such a condition is satisfied.
If the main CPU 111 determines that one round has ended (Yes in step S 281), the process proceeds to step S 282, and if it is determined that one round has not ended (in step S 282) No), the jackpot game processing ends.
In step S282, the main CPU 111 sets 0 in the opening count (K) storage area, and sets 0 in the special winning opening ball number (C) storage area. That is, the number-of-openings (K) storage area and the number-of-big-prize-opening ball entry (C) storage area are cleared.

In step S283, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area is maximum. If the number of round games (R) is the largest (Yes at step S283), the process proceeds to step S286. If the number of round games (R) is not the largest (No at step S283), the process proceeds to step S284. Transfer.
In step S284, the main CPU 111 sets a round end designation command in the effect transmission data storage area according to the number of round games (R) in order to transmit round game end information to the effect control board 120.

Next, in step S285, the main CPU 111 adds “1” to the current round game count (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area and stores it.
On the other hand, when determining in step S283 that the number of round games (R) is the largest, the main CPU 111 resets the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area.

Next, the main CPU 111 determines which jackpot of “long hit” or “short hit” according to the stop symbol data, and transmits an ending command according to the type of jackpot to the effect control board 120 Therefore, it is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.
In step S288, the main CPU 111 determines which jackpot of "long hit" or "short hit" according to the stop symbol data, and sets the ending time according to the type of big hit to the special game timer counter Do.

In step S289, the main CPU 111 determines whether the set ending time has elapsed.
When the main CPU 111 determines that the ending time has elapsed (Yes in step S 289), the special figure special power processing data is set to 5 in step S 290, and the jackpot gaming processing is ended.
If it is determined in step S289 that the ending time has not elapsed (No in step S289), the jackpot gaming process is ended as it is.

<Small hit game processing>
FIG. 31 is a flow chart for explaining the small hitting game process by the main control board.
First, in step S301, the main CPU 111 determines whether the opening is currently in progress.
If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress (Yes in step S301), the processing moves to step S302. If it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress (No in step S301), the processing moves to step S305.

In step S302, the main CPU 111 determines whether a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether the special game timer counter = 0 or not, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed.
As a result, when the opening time has not passed, the small hitting game processing is ended, and when the opening time has passed, the processing is shifted to step S303.

In step S303, the main CPU 111 performs small hitting start setting processing.
The small hitting start setting process determines an open mode determination table according to the kind of small hitting according to the stop symbol data.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10, an open mode determination table (FIG. 12) for small hitting is determined according to the stop symbol data.

In step S304, the main CPU 111 performs a special winning opening open process.
In the special winning opening opening process, first, “1” is added to the opening number (K) stored in the opening number (K) storage area and stored. Also, to open the open / close door 16b of the first big winning opening 16 and the movable piece 17b of the second big winning opening, set the energization start data of the first big winning opening / closing solenoid 16c and the second big winning opening solenoid 17c. In addition, referring to the release mode determination table (see FIG. 11) determined in step S303 above, the opening times of the first big winning opening 16 and the second big winning opening 17 are special based on the number of times of opening (K) Set to the game timer counter.

  In step S305, the main CPU 111 determines whether it is in the process of ending. The term "ending" as used herein refers to processing after all the games having the preset number of times of opening (K) are finished. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress (Yes in step S305), the process proceeds to step S304. If it is determined that the current ending is not in progress (No in step S305), the process proceeds to step S306. Be

  In step S306, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 are being closed. If it is determined that the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 are closed, the process proceeds to step S307, and it is determined that the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 are not closed. If it has been, the process proceeds to step S308.

  In step S307, the main CPU 111 determines whether the closing time set in step S309 described later has elapsed. The closing time is also determined based on whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, as in the opening time. As a result, if the closing time has not passed (No in step S307), the small hitting game processing is ended, and if the closing time has passed (Yes in step S307), the processing is transferred to step S304 .

In step S308, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the “opening completion condition” for ending the opening of the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 is satisfied. This "opening end condition" is that the value of the first large winning opening entrance ball counter (C1), the second large winning opening entrance ball counter (C2) has reached the maximum number (for example, nine), or the first large The fact that one opening time of the winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 has elapsed (the special game timer counter has become 0) corresponds to this.
Then, if it is determined that the "release end condition" is satisfied (Yes in step S308), the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the "release end condition" is not satisfied (No in step S308) The hit game processing ends.

In step S309, the main CPU 111 performs a special winning opening closing process.
The special winning opening closing process is performed by the first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 16c and the second large winning opening solenoid 17c to close the opening / closing door 16b of the first large winning opening 16 and the movable piece 17b of the second large winning opening 17. While setting the energization stop data, referring to the release mode determination table (refer to FIG. 10) determined in the above step S303, based on the current number of times of release (K), the first big winning opening 16, 2nd large The closing time of the winning opening 17 is set to the special game timer counter. As a result, the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17 are closed.

In step S310, the main CPU 111 determines whether a small hitting end condition is satisfied. As the small hitting end condition, the number of opening (K) is the maximum number of opening, or the value of the 1st large winning a prize entrance ball counter (C1) and the 2nd large winning a prize entrance counter (C2) is the maximum number ( For example, it has reached 9).
When it is determined that the small hitting end condition is satisfied (Yes in step S310), the process proceeds to step S311, and when it is determined that the small hitting end condition is not satisfied (No in step S310), The small hitting game processing ends.

In step S311, the main CPU 111 sets 0 in the opening count (K) storage area, and sets 0 in the special winning opening ball number (C) storage area. That is, the number-of-openings (K) storage area and the number-of-big-prize-opening ball entry (C) storage area are cleared.
In step S312, the main CPU 111 sets an ending command according to the type of the small hit to the effect control board 120 in the effect transmission data storage area in accordance with the stop symbol data.

In step S313, the main CPU 111 sets an ending time corresponding to the type of the small hit in the special game timer counter according to the stop symbol data.
In step S314, main CPU 111 determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (Yes in step S314), the special figure special power process data is selected in step S315. Set 5 and finish small hitting game processing.
When it is determined in step S314 that the ending time has not elapsed (No in step S314), the main CPU 111 ends the small hitting game processing as it is.

<Special game end processing>
FIG. 32 is a flow chart for explaining special game end processing by the main control board.
In step S321, the main CPU 111 loads stop symbol data set in the stop symbol data storage area and game information in the game state buffer.
In step S322, the main CPU 111 refers to the jackpot end setting data table shown in FIG. 9, and based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the gaming state buffer, the high probability game flag at the end of the jackpot A process of whether to set the high probability game flag in the storage area is performed. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", a high probability flag is set (turned on) in the high probability gaming flag storage area.

  In step S323, the main CPU 111 refers to the jackpot end setting data table shown in FIG. 9, and based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the game information in the game state buffer, the high probability game number (X) The storage area is set a predetermined number of times. For example, if the stop symbol data is "02", 10000 times are set in the high probability game number (X) storage area.

  In step S324, the main CPU 111 refers to the jackpot end setting data table shown in FIG. 9, and flags the time-saving game flag storage area based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the gaming information in the gaming state buffer. Process whether to set. For example, when the stop symbol data is "01", a flag is set (turned on) in the time saving game flag storage area (see FIG. 9).

  In step S325, the main CPU 111 refers to the jackpot end setting data table shown in FIG. 9, and based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the gaming information in the gaming state buffer, the number of time saving games (J) storage area Set the specified number of times. For example, when the stop symbol data is "01", 10000 is set in the time saving game frequency (J) storage area.

In step S326, the main CPU 111 refers to the jackpot end setting data table shown in FIG. 9, and based on the stop symbol data loaded in step S321 and the gaming information in the gaming state buffer, the specific period number counter (T) Set the specified number of times. Specifically, when the stop symbol data is "11" to "14" and the gaming state buffer is 00H, the specific period number counter (T) is set 50 times.
In step S327, the main CPU 111 confirms the gaming state, and sets a gaming state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area.
In step S328, the main CPU 111 sets 0 in the special figure special power process data, and ends the special game end process.

<Pu-Pu Electric control processing>
FIG. 33 is a flow chart for explaining a common drawing and common control process by the main control board.
First, at step S331, the value of the data processing routine data is loaded, and at step S332 the branch address is calculated from the data processing routine data loaded.
If the common CPU common processing data = 0 (Yes in step S333), the main CPU 111 performs normal symbol variation processing in step S334, and ends the common computer common control processing.
If the normal drawing general processing data is not 0 (No in step S333), it is determined that the general drawing general processing data = 1, and in step S335, the ordinary electric role control processing (step S335) is performed. End the control process.

<Normal pattern change processing>
FIG. 34 is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol variation processing by the main control board.
In step S341, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not variation display of a normal symbol is in progress. If the normal symbol variation display is in progress (Yes in step S341), the process proceeds to step S358, and if the normal symbol variation display is not in progress (No in step S341), the process proceeds to step S342.

If it is determined in step S341 that the variable display is not in progress (No in step S341), in step S342, the main CPU 111 determines whether the stop display time of the normal symbol set in step S361 described later has elapsed. judge.
As a result, when it is determined that the stop time of the normal symbol has elapsed (Yes in step S342), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the stop time of the normal symbol has not elapsed Normal symbol variation processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S342 that the stop time of the normal symbol has passed, in step S343, the main CPU 111 holds the number of normal symbols stored in the normal symbol storage number (G) storage area (G) It is determined whether is 1 or more. As a result, if the number of reserved normal symbols (G) stored in the number of normal symbol storages (G) storage area is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S344, and the number of suspended holdings (G) is "0" Since normal symbol variation display is not performed, the normal symbol variation processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S342 that the number of reserved symbols (G) for normal symbols is "1" or more (Yes in step S343), the main CPU 111 is stored in the number of reserved special symbols (G) storage area A new hold number (G) obtained by subtracting “1” from the existing value (G) is stored.

  Next, the main CPU 111 performs shift processing of the data stored in the normal symbol storage area. Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit. At this time, the data stored in the immediately preceding storage unit is written to a predetermined processing area and erased from the normal symbol storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 111 determines the collision determination random number value stored in the normal symbol storage area. When a plurality of collision determination random number values are stored, the collision determination random number values are read out in the order in which they are stored.

Specifically, the collision determination table shown in FIG. 6C is referred to, and the collision determination random number value shifted to the processing region is compared with the above-described table to determine whether or not the collision occurs. For example, according to the above table, if it is a non-time saving game state, it is determined that one of the hit random numbers "0" among the random numbers from "0" to "19" is a hit determination random number, For example, among the random numbers “0” to “19”, it is determined that the 19 random numbers for determination of “0” to “18” are the hits, and the other random numbers are determined to be lost.
As a result, when it is determined to be a hit (Yes at step S347), the process proceeds to step S348, and when it is not determined to be a hit (No at step S347), the process proceeds to step S352.

  When it is determined in the above step S347 that a hit is made, the main CPU 111 performs symbol determination processing (step S348). Here, with reference to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7A, the random number value for symbol determination shifted to the processing area is determined to determine either a long open symbol or a short open symbol. Specifically, when the random number for symbol determination shifted to the processing area is “0” or “1”, it is determined as a long open symbol, and in the case of “2” to “10”, a short open symbol and judge.

And when the result of the symbol determination processing in step S348 is determined as a long open symbol (Yes in step S349), the long open symbol is set (step S350), and when it is determined as a short open symbol ( No) short opening pattern is set with step S349 (step S351).
Further, when it is not determined to be a hit in step S347 (No in step S347), the main CPU 111 sets a lost symbol in step S352.

  Next, the main CPU 111 sets a common drawing fluctuation pattern designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. In addition, the common drawing fluctuation pattern specification command indicates whether the determined normal symbol is the long open symbol, the short open symbol, or the lost symbol, and the command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 And, in the effect control board 120, the effect (the change effect of the normal symbol) related to the lottery of the normal symbol is executed.

Next, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the time saving game flag storage area in step S354.
The case where the flag is turned on in the time saving game flag storage area is when the gaming state is in the time saving game state, and when the flag is not turned on, the gaming state is in the non-time short playing state It is time.
If it is determined that the short time game flag is on (Yes in step S354), the process proceeds to step S355, and if it is determined that the short time game flag is not on (No in step S354), step S356 Transfer the process to

  If it is determined in step S354 that the flag is turned on in the time saving game flag storage area, the main CPU 111 sets a counter corresponding to 1 second to the normal symbol time counter (step S355), and the time saving game flag If it is determined that the flag is not turned on in the storage area, a counter corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the normal symbol time counter (step S356). By the process of step S355 or step S356, the time of the variation display of the normal symbol will be determined. The normal symbol time counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S102.

  Next, the main CPU 111 starts variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 22. The normal symbol variation display blinks the LED at a predetermined interval on the normal symbol display device 22 to give the player an impression as if the lottery is currently being performed. The variation display of the normal symbol is continuously performed only for the time set in step S355 or step S356. When this processing is ended, the normal symbol variation processing is ended.

When it is determined in step S341 that the variable display is being performed (No in step S341), the main CPU 111 determines whether the set fluctuation time has elapsed in step S348.
That is, the normal symbol time counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms, and it is determined whether the set normal symbol time counter is zero. As a result, when it is determined that the set fluctuation time has not elapsed, since it is necessary to continue the fluctuation display as it is, the normal symbol fluctuation processing is ended and the next subroutine is executed.

If the main CPU 111 determines in step S358 that the set fluctuation time has elapsed (Yes in step S358), the main CPU 111 stops fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 22 in step S359.
At this time, the normal symbol display device 22 displays the normal symbol (long open symbol, short open symbol or lost symbol) set by the previous routine processing in a stopped state. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the normal symbol lottery.

Next, the main CPU 111 sets a normal symbol determination command in the transmission data storage area for effect in step S360 in order to stop the variation display of the normal symbol and determine that the symbol is determined to the effect control board 120. The normal symbol determination command can identify which symbol the symbol displayed in the stopped state is.
Next, in step S361, the main CPU 111 sets a time for causing the normal symbol display device 22 to stop and display the normal symbol. Here, in order to allow the player to recognize the determined symbol, the counter corresponding to one second is set in the normal symbol time counter with the stop time of the normal symbol as one second.

  Next, in step S362, the main CPU 111 determines whether the set normal symbol is a hit symbol (long open symbol or short open symbol), and the set normal symbol is a hit symbol In the case (Yes in step S 362), in step S 363, the routine drawing general processing data = 1 is set, and the processing is transferred to the ordinary electric role control processing, and the ordinary symbol set is the lost symbol. (No at step S362), the normal symbol variation process is ended as it is.

<Normal electric role control processing>
FIG. 35 is a flow chart for explaining ordinary motor-operated part control processing by the main control board.
It is to be noted that the normal motorized product control process is executed when it is determined as "hit" in step S362 of the normal symbol variation process shown in FIG.

  In step S371, the main CPU 111 determines whether the normal symbol stop time set in step 361 (FIG. 34) has elapsed. As a result, when it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S372, and when it is determined that the normal symbol stop time has not elapsed (No in step S371) End the control process.

  If it is determined in step S371 that the normal symbol stop time has elapsed, the main CPU 111 determines in step S372 whether or not the starting opening open / close solenoid 14c is under open control. As a result, when it is determined that the start opening opening / closing solenoid 14c is in the opening control (Yes in step S372), the process proceeds to step S382, and when it is determined that the opening opening opening solenoid 14c is not in the opening control. (No in step S372), the process proceeds to step S373.

If it is determined in step S372 that the starting opening opening / closing solenoid 14c is not in the opening control, the main CPU 111 determines whether the time saving game flag is on, that is, whether the current playing state is the time saving game state. Do.
As a result, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the short time gaming state (Yes in step S373), the process proceeds to step S378, and when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the short time gaming state (step The process proceeds to step S 374.

If it is determined in step S373 that the current gaming state is not the short time gaming state, the main CPU 111 determines that the symbol being displayed stopped on the normal symbol display device 22 in step S374, that is, the step S361 (FIG. 34) Determine if the symbol set in is a long open symbol.
As a result, when it is determined that the symbol displayed stopped is the long opening symbol (Yes in step S 374), a counter corresponding to 4.2 seconds is set in the general power open time counter in step S 375.
When it is determined that the symbol displayed stopped in step S374 is not a long open symbol (short open symbol) (No in step S374), 0.2 sec is displayed in the common charge open time counter in step S377. Set the corresponding counter.

  Next, the main CPU 111 sets a long open start command in the effect transmission data storage area in order to transmit to the effect control board 120 that the opening of the second start port 14 is started. In the present embodiment, the long opening symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 120 at the start of energization of the start opening / closing solenoid 14c only when the long opening symbol is determined and the short opening game state is determined. . However, at the start of energization of the starting opening opening / closing solenoid 14c, the type of the normal symbol or the game state may be transmitted to the effect control board 120 so as to be distinguishable.

  Further, even if it is determined in step S373 that the current gaming state is the short time gaming state, the main CPU 111 is the symbol displayed and stopped on the normal symbol display device 22 in step S378 as in the step S374. Whether it is a long opening design is determined.

As a result, when it is determined that the symbol displayed being stopped is a long opening symbol (Yes in step S378), the main CPU 111 sets a counter corresponding to 5 seconds in the general public opening time counter in step S379. .
When it is determined in step S378 that the symbol displayed stopped is not a long open symbol (short open symbol), the main CPU 111 corresponds to the common power open time counter in step S380 for 3 seconds in step S380. Set the counter.

In step S381, the main CPU 111 sets a table for energizing the starting opening opening / closing solenoid 14c. Specifically, when the process of step S 375 is performed, the long release TBL 1 shown in FIG. 17A is set, and when the process of step S 377 is performed, the long open TBL 1 is shown in FIG. Set the short opening TBL1. When the process of step S379 is performed, the long open TBL2 shown in FIG. 17B is set, and when the process of step S380 is performed, the short open TBL2 shown in FIG. 17D. Set
Then, based on the set table, energization of the starting opening opening / closing solenoid 14c is started. As a result, the second starting port 14 is opened and controlled to the second mode.

  In step S382, the main CPU 111 determines whether or not the set general power supply open time has elapsed. That is, the common charge open time counter is subjected to a subtraction process every 4 ms, and it is determined whether the set common charge open time counter = 0. As a result, when it is determined that the general power open time counter becomes 0 (Yes in step S 382), the process proceeds to step S 383, and when it is determined that the general power open time counter does not become 0 ( No) Step S382 ends the ordinary motor-operated symbol control process.

If it is determined in step S382 that the set general power release time has elapsed, the main CPU 111 sets start port solenoid energization stop data in step S383 and stops energization of the start port opening / closing solenoid 14c. . As a result, the second starting port 14 returns to the first mode, and it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the game ball again, and the normal game being executed is ended.
Next, the main CPU 111 sets the general-purpose power processing data = 0 in step S384, and the normal motor-operated control processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37, details of various tables stored in the sub ROM 122 will be described.

<Variation production pattern determination table>
36 and 37 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table for determining the variation mode of the effect symbol in the first special symbol display device 20, and FIG. 36 is a special symbol in the first special symbol display device 20. 37 is a view showing an example of a variation presentation pattern determination table based on the variation pattern of FIG. 37, and FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a variation presentation pattern determination table based on the variation pattern of the special symbol in the second special symbol display device 21. is there.

The variation production pattern determination table refers to, for example, one variation presentation pattern determination table from among a plurality of variation presentation pattern determination tables according to the current gaming state and presentation mode, and here, the variation presentation pattern determination table Will be described by way of example.
Note that the effect mode is, for example, a mode different from the background, BGM, options for variation effect, etc., and is a mode that can be appropriately transitioned in order to eliminate the monotony of the game being played.

The "variation effect pattern" is a specific effect mode in the effect means (image display device 31, effect role device 32, effect illumination device 33, sound output device 34) performed during the change of the special symbol. Say For example, in the image display device 31, the variation mode of the effect pattern 35 is determined by the variation effect pattern.
In addition, in the "reach" in the present embodiment, a part of the combination of the rendering symbols 35 for notifying transition to the special game is stopped and displayed, and the other rendering symbol images 36 are performing the variation display. Say. For example, when the combination of the three-digit effect symbol 35 of "777" is set as the combination of the effect symbol 35 to notify transition to the big hit game, the two effect symbols 35 are stopped and displayed at "7" , The remaining effect pattern 35 is in a state of performing variable display.

The variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 is configured by associating the variation pattern specification command received from the main control board 110, the effect random number value 1 and the variation effect pattern.
The sub CPU 121 acquires the effect random number value 1 and refers to the fluctuation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 36 and 37 to change the fluctuation pattern specification command received from the main control board 110 and the acquired effect random number 1 Based on the change production pattern is determined. Then, an effect pattern specification command corresponding to the determined change effect pattern is transmitted to the host CPU 151 of the image control board 150.

  In the fluctuation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 36, if the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110 is “E6H” “01H” and the effect random number 1 is “0” to “49”, the fluctuation effect Select pattern 1. Then, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect pattern designation command “A1H” “01H” corresponding to the change effect pattern 1 is generated and transmitted to the image control board 150. The content of the effect of the fluctuation effect pattern 1 is, for example, reach A1 effect (hit effect).

  Further, if the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110 is “E6H” or “01H” and the effect random number value 1 is “50” to “99”, the fluctuation effect pattern 2 is selected. Then, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect pattern designating command “A1H” “02H” corresponding to the change effect pattern 2 is generated and transmitted to the image control board 150. The effect content of the fluctuation effect pattern 2 is, for example, reach A2 effect (hit effect).

  Also, if the variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110 is "E6H" or "02H" and the effect random number value 1 is "0" to "49", the variation effect pattern 3 is selected, and the special symbol variation At the start, the effect pattern specification commands “A1H” and “03H” corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern 3 are generated and transmitted to the image control board 150. The content of the effect of the fluctuation effect pattern 3 is, for example, reach B1 effect (hit effect).

  Further, if the variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110 is “E6H” or “02H” and the effect random number value 1 is “50” to “99”, the variation effect pattern 4 is selected. Then, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect pattern designation command “A1H” “04H” corresponding to the change effect pattern 2 is generated and transmitted to the image control board 150. The content of the effect of the fluctuation effect pattern 4 is, for example, reach B2 effect (hit effect).

When the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110 is "E6H" or "03H", the fluctuation effect pattern 5 is selected regardless of the value "0" to "99" of the effect random number value 1. Then, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect pattern designating command “A1H” “05H” corresponding to the change effect pattern 5 is generated and transmitted to the image control board 150. The content of the effect of the fluctuation effect pattern 5 is, for example, a symbol turning effect.
Similarly, when the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110 is “E6H” “04H” to “E6H” “06H”, regardless of the value “0” to “99” of the effect random number value 1, Select the variation effect patterns 6-8, and when the variation start of the special symbol, create the variation pattern specification commands "A1H""06H"-"A1H""08H" corresponding to the variation patterns 6-8 respectively to control the image control board Send to 150. The effect contents of the fluctuation effect patterns 6 to 8 are, for example, chance effects.

  When the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110 is "E6H" or "07H", the fluctuation effect pattern 9 is selected regardless of the value "0" to "99" of the effect random number value 1. Then, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect pattern specification command “A1H” “09H” corresponding to the change effect pattern 9 is generated and transmitted to the image control board 150. The effect content of the change effect pattern 9 is, for example, a normal change effect.

  Also, if the variation pattern specification command received from the main control board 110 is "E6H" or "08H" and the effect random number 1 is "0" to "49", the variation effect pattern 10 is selected, and the special symbol variation is made. At the start, the effect pattern designation command “A1H” “0AH” corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern 10 is generated and transmitted to the image control board 150. The content of the effect of the fluctuation effect pattern 10 is, for example, reach A1 effect (loss).

  Also, if the variation pattern specification command received from the main control board 110 is "E6H" or "08H" and the effect random number 1 is "50" to "99", the variation effect pattern 11 is selected, and the special symbol variation is made. At the time of start, rendering pattern designation commands “A1H” and “0BH” corresponding to the variation rendering pattern 11 are generated and transmitted to the image control board 150. The content of the effect of the fluctuation effect pattern 11 is, for example, reach A2 effect (loss).

  Similarly, if the variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110 is "E6H" or "09H", and the effect random number value 1 is "0" to "49", the variation effect pattern 12 is selected and the effect disturbance is generated. If the numerical value 1 is “50” to “99”, the variation presentation pattern 13 is selected. Then, at the start of variation of the special symbol, effect pattern designation commands “A1H”, “0CH”, “A1H” and “0DH” corresponding to the variation effect patterns 12 and 13 are generated and transmitted to the image control board 150. The effect contents of the change effect patterns 12 and 13 are, for example, reach B1 effect (loss) and reach B2 effect (loss).

  Similarly, when the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main control board 110 is “E6H”, “0AH”, “E6H”, “0BH”, regardless of the value “0” to “99” of the effect random number value 1, Select the variation effect patterns 14 and 15, and start variation of the special symbol, generate variation pattern specification commands "A1H", "0EH", "A1H" and "0FH" corresponding to the variation patterns 14 and 15, respectively, and control the image control board Send to 150. The effect contents of the change effect patterns 14 and 15 are, for example, shortening fluctuation A effect and shortening fluctuation B effect.

  When the variation pattern specification command received from the main control board 110 is “E6H”, “21H” to “E6H”, “2BH”, variation patterns 1 to 15 are selected by the same selection process as above, and the variation of the special symbol is performed. At the start, fluctuation pattern designation commands “A1H”, “11H” to “A1H” and “1DH” respectively corresponding to fluctuation patterns 1 to 15 are generated and transmitted to the image control board 150.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table in the second special symbol display device 20 shown in FIG. 37, the MODE of the variation pattern designation command received from the main control board is “E7H”, and the effect pattern transmitted to the image control board The variation command pattern determination table in the first special symbol display device 20 shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even if the variation pattern designation command of the same special symbol is configured to be able to determine different variation presentation patterns based on random number 1 for effect, the special symbol The number of variation pattern designation commands is reduced to reduce the storage capacity of the main control board 110.

  Although not shown, the effect pattern designating command changes the setting value of MODE other than the one corresponding to the variation effect pattern, and the effect pattern designating command corresponding to the customer waiting effect pattern (MODE = 01H ), “Rendering pattern designating command corresponding to winning start rendering pattern (MODE = 02H)”, “rendering pattern designating command corresponding to jackpot rendering pattern (MODE = 03H)”, “rendering pattern corresponding to winning end rendering pattern Various rendering pattern designation commands such as “designation command (MODE = 04H)” are transmitted to the image control board 150.

  Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 121 in the effect control board 120 will be described.

<Main processing of effect control board>
FIG. 38 is a flow chart for explaining the main processing by the effect control board.
In step S510, the sub CPU 121 performs initialization processing. In this process, the sub CPU 121 reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 122 in response to the power-on, and initializes and sets a flag and the like stored in the sub RAM 123. If this process ends, the process moves to step S520.

  In step S520, the sub CPU 121 performs effect random number value update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 121 performs a process of updating various random number values stored in the sub RAM 123. Thereafter, the process of step S510 is repeatedly performed until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

<Timer interrupt processing of effect control board>
FIG. 39 is a flowchart for explaining the timer interrupt process by the effect control board.
Although not shown, a clock pulse is generated every predetermined cycle (2 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 120, and the timer interrupt processing program is read to Timer interrupt processing is executed.

First, in step S601, the sub CPU 121 saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 121 in the stack area.
In step S602, the sub CPU 121 performs update processing of various timer counters used in the effect control board 120.
In step S603, the sub CPU 121 performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 121 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 123. Specific description of the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. When the effect control board 120 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process of the effect control board 120 (not shown) is generated, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer. Thereafter, analysis processing of the command received in step S603 is performed.

  In step S 604, the sub CPU 121 checks the signal of the effect button detection switch 8 a input via the lamp control board 140, and performs effect input control processing regarding the effect button 8. The specific description of the effect input control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S 605, the sub CPU 121 transmits various data set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123 to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140.
In step S606, the sub CPU 121 restores the information saved in step S601 to the register of the sub CPU 121.

<Command analysis process>
40 and 41 are flowcharts for explaining command analysis processing by the effect control board. The command analysis process 2 shown in FIG. 41 is performed subsequently to the command analysis process 1 shown in FIG.
In step S611, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not there is a command in the reception buffer, and confirms whether or not the command has been received.
If there is no command in the reception buffer (No in step S611), the sub CPU 121 ends the command analysis process, and if there is a command in the reception buffer (Yes in step S611), the process proceeds to step S621.

In step S621, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting command. The customer waiting command is set in step S217 (FIG. 26) of the main control board 110.
If the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting command (Yes in step S621), the sub CPU 121 transfers the process to step S622. If not (No in step S621), the process proceeds to step S631. Transfer.
In step S 622, the sub CPU 121 performs a customer waiting effect pattern determination process of determining a customer waiting effect pattern. Specifically, the customer waiting effect pattern is determined, and the determined customer waiting effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined customer waiting effect pattern is transmitted to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 In order to do this, data based on the determined customer waiting effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123.
Thus, the customer control effect is started by the image control board 150.

In step S631, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start winning combination designation command. The start winning combination designation command is set in step S154, step S156 or step S157 (FIG. 23) of the main control board 110.
If the command stored in the reception buffer is the start winning combination designation command (Yes in step S631), the sub CPU 121 shifts the processing to step S632, and if not (No in step S631), the processing proceeds to step S641. Transfer the process.

  In step S632, the sub-CPU 121 analyzes the received start winning designation command and executes data update processing corresponding to the start winning designation command. The start winning designation command is associated with information relating to a jackpot, a small jack, and a loss provisionally determined by the preliminary determination processing. Therefore, information on the newly reserved first hold (U1) or second hold (U2) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 123 here.

  In step S 633, the sub CPU 121 analyzes the start winning combination designation command, and performs a suspension display mode determination process of transmitting the suspension display command to the image presentation control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 in order to perform suspension display in a predetermined manner. As a result, the current number of reservations of the first hold (U1) and the second hold (U2) is displayed on the image display device 31.

In step S641, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a fluctuation pattern designation command. The fluctuation pattern designation command is set in step S209 (FIG. 26) of the main control board 110.
If the sub CPU 121 determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a variation pattern specification command (Yes in step S641), the process proceeds to step S642, and if it is not a variation pattern specification command (No in step S641), step S651 Transfer the process to

  In step S642, based on the received fluctuation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 121 performs fluctuation presentation pattern determination processing of determining one fluctuation presentation pattern from among a plurality of fluctuation presentation patterns. The variation presentation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S643, the sub CPU 121 shifts the holding display data stored in the first holding storage area and the second holding storage area and the data corresponding to the start winning combination designation command, and information on the holding display data after the shift. Is carried out to transmit the image presentation control board 150 and the lamp control board 140 to the pending display mode updating process.

In step S651, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a rendering symbol designation command. The effect symbol specification command is set in steps S227, S231, and S232 (FIG. 27) of the main control board 110.
If the command stored in the reception buffer is a rendering symbol designation command (Yes at step S651), the sub CPU 121 shifts the processing to step S652, and if not a rendering symbol designation command (No at step S651), step S661 Transfer the process to

  In step S652, the sub-CPU 121 performs effect symbol determination processing of determining the effect symbol 35 to be stopped and displayed on the image display device 31, based on the content of the received effect symbol specification command. Specifically, the effect symbol designating command is analyzed to determine effect symbol data constituting a combination of effect symbols 35 according to the presence or absence of big hit and the type of big hit, and the determined effect symbol data is used as a effect symbol storage area Set to

In step S661, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a symbol determination command. The symbol determination command is set in step S243 (FIG. 28) of the main control board 110.
If the command stored in the reception buffer is the symbol determination command (Yes at step S661), the sub CPU 121 transfers the process to step S662, and if the command is not the symbol determination command (No at step S661), the process proceeds to step S671. Transfer.

  In step S 662, the sub CPU 121 transmits the data based on the effect symbol data determined in step S 652 and the stop instruction data for causing the effect symbol to stop and display in order to stop the effect symbol 35. Perform set effect symbol stop processing.

In step S671, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a common drawing fluctuation pattern designation command. The common drawing fluctuation pattern designation command is set in step S 353 (FIG. 34) of the main control board 110.
If the sub CPU 121 determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a common drawing fluctuation pattern designation command (Yes in step S71), the process proceeds to step S672, and is not a common drawing fluctuation pattern designation command (No in step S671) ), The process proceeds to step S681.

  In step S 672, the sub CPU 121 performs common drawing fluctuation presentation pattern determination processing of determining one common drawing fluctuation presentation pattern from among a plurality of common drawing fluctuation presentation patterns based on the received common drawing fluctuation pattern specification command.

In step S681, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a long release start command. The long open start command is set in step S376 (FIG. 35) of the main control board 110.
If the sub CPU 121 determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a long release start command (Yes in step S681), the process proceeds to step S682. If the command is not a long release start command (No in step S681), step S700. Transfer the process to

  In step S682, the sub CPU 121 performs long open effect processing. Here, in order to notify the player that the second start port 14 is opened for a long time (4.2 seconds) in the non-time-short game state, a notification effect is executed.

In step S691, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol determination command. The normal symbol determination command is set in step S360 (FIG. 34) of the main control board 110.
If the command stored in the reception buffer is a normal symbol determination command (Yes at step S691), the sub CPU 121 shifts the processing to step S692, and if not a normal symbol determination command (No at step S691), step S700. Transfer the process to

  In step S692, the sub-CPU 121 causes the sub-RAM 123 to display the production symbol data corresponding to the received normal symbol determination command and the stop instruction data for stopping the general production effect symbol, in order to stop the general production effect symbol. Perform normal symbol fluctuation stop processing set in the transmission buffer.

In step S700, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. The gaming state designation command is set in step S258 (FIG. 29) and step S32 (FIG. 32) of the main control board 110.
If the sub CPU 121 determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command (Yes in step S700), the process proceeds to step S701, and if it is not a gaming state designation command (No in step S700), step S711 Transfer the process to

In step S701, the sub CPU 121 sets the gaming state based on the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area in the sub RAM 123.
In step S711, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening command. The opening command is set in step S265 (FIG. 29) of the main control board 110.
If the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening command (Yes in step S711), the sub CPU 121 shifts the processing to step S712, and if it is not an opening command (No in step S711), transfers the processing to step S721. .

  In step S712, the sub CPU 121 performs a hit start effect pattern determination process of determining a hit start effect pattern. Specifically, the hit start effect pattern is determined based on the opening command, and the determined hit start effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the determined information of the hit start effect pattern is displayed on the image rendering control board 150 and the lamp In order to transmit data to the control board 140, data based on the determined hit start effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123.

In step S721, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special winning opening opening specification command. The special winning opening open designation command is set in step S275 (FIG. 30) of the main control board 110.
If the command stored in the reception buffer is the special winning opening opening designation command (Yes in step S721), the sub CPU 121 shifts the processing to step S722, and is not the special winning opening opening designation command (No in step S721) ), The process proceeds to step S731.

  In step S722, the sub CPU 121 performs in-round effect pattern determination processing of determining a jackpot effect pattern. Specifically, based on the special winning opening opening specification command having information on how many rounds the game starts, an in-round presentation pattern is determined for each starting round. Then, the determined in-round effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the corresponding data is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123 in order to transmit the information of the effect pattern to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. Do.

In step S731, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round end designation command. The round end designation command is set in step S284 (FIG. 30) of the main control board 110.
If the sub CPU 121 determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a round end designating command (Yes in step S731), the process proceeds to step S732. If the command is not a round end designating command (No in step S731), step S741. Transfer the process to

In step S732, the sub CPU 121 performs a paused effect pattern determination process of determining an effect pattern between rounds.
In step S741, the sub CPU 121 confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending command. The ending command is set in step S287 (FIG. 30) and step S312 (FIG. 31) of the main control board 110.
If the command stored in the reception buffer is the ending command (Yes in step S741), the sub CPU 121 shifts the processing to step S742. If the command is not the ending command (No in step S741), the command analysis processing ends. .

  In step S742, the sub CPU 121 performs a win end effect pattern determination process of determining a win end effect pattern. Specifically, the hit end effect pattern is determined based on the ending command, and the determined hit end effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the determined information of the hit end effect pattern is displayed on the image rendering control board 150 and the lamp In order to transmit to the control board 140, data based on the determined hit end effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 123.

<Variation production pattern determination processing>
FIG. 42 is a flow chart for explaining the variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board.
When the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is stored in the reception buffer of the effect control board 120, the sub CPU 121 executes the fluctuation effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. The variation presentation pattern determination process is for determining a variation presentation pattern indicating how to control various presentation devices including the image display device 31 during the variation display of the special symbol.
First, in step S801, the sub CPU 121 acquires the effect random number value updated in step S520.
Next, in step S802, the sub CPU 121 sets a variation effect pattern determination table with reference to the current gaming state and the effect mode.

Next, in step S803, the sub CPU 121 determines a variation effect pattern of 1 based on the variation effect pattern determination table set in step S802 and the effect random number value acquired in step S801.
Further, there are also cases where the presence or absence of the notice effect execution and the type of the notice effect in the case of execution are determined using the notice effect determination table.
Next, in step S804, the sub CPU 121 transmits a rendering pattern designation command so as to transmit the variation rendering pattern (and the presence or absence and type of preview rendering) determined in step S803 to the image control substrate 150 and the lamp control substrate 140. Set in the transmission data storage area. When the effect pattern specification command is transmitted to the image control substrate 150 and the lamp control substrate 140, the image display device 31, the effect product device 32, the effect illumination device 33, and the sound output device based on the effect pattern specification command. 34 are controlled.

Next, in step S805, the sub CPU 121 sets a rendering time timer in order to measure the time elapsed since the start of the variable rendering. For example, when the fluctuation presentation pattern related to reach A is determined, a counter corresponding to 60 seconds is set.
Next, in step S806, the sub CPU 121 sets a symbol determination period, which is a period for causing the image display device 31 to stop and display the effect pattern 35. The symbol determination period is from 3 seconds before the end of the change effect to the end of the change effect.

<Effect input control process>
FIG. 43 is a flowchart for describing an effect input control process by the effect control board.
First, in step S811, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not there is a valid effect button detection signal from the effect button detection switch 8a based on the effect button detection command from the lamp control board 1140. Here, if the sub CPU 121 determines that there is no effect button detection signal (No at step S811), the process ends, and if it is determined that there is an effect button detection signal (Yes at step S811), the process of step S812 is performed. Transfer to processing.

  In step S812, the sub CPU 121 determines whether or not the button operation effect execution flag = 01 is set in the storage area of the sub RAM 123. Here, if the button operation effect execution possible flag = 01 is not set (No in step S812), the sub CPU 121 ends the processing, and the button operation effect execution possible flag = 01 is set (step Yes in step S812), the process proceeds to step S813.

  The button operation effect execution possible flag is for judging whether or not the effect corresponding to the operation can be performed based on the fact that the button operation is performed, and the flag “01 If it is “,” it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the operation, and the flag “00” indicates that it is impossible to execute the effect corresponding to the operation, and the operation valid period of the effect button The flag "01" is set according to the start, and the flag "00" is set when the effect button is operated or when the operation valid period ends without the effect button being operated.

In step S813, the sub CPU 121 sets a button operation effect execution command in the transmission buffer. This command is a command for causing the image control board 150 to execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 8.
Here, the sub CPU 121 transmits the command set in the transmission buffer in step S 605 (see FIG. 39) after the effect input control process to the image control board 150 and the lamp control board 140. The image control board 150 actuates the image display device 31 and the sound output device 32 based on the received command, and the lamp control board 140 actuates the rendering character object device 32 and the effect lighting device 33 based on the received command. Let

Next, the image control board 150 will be described.
In the image control board 150, when a command for effect is received from the effect control board 120, the host CPU 151 reads out the audio output device control program from the host ROM 153 based on the received command for effect, and an audio output device 342 The host CPU 151 reads out the animation control program from the host ROM 153 and controls the image display on the image display device 31.

  Here, processing executed by the host CPU 151 in the image control board 150 will be described.

<Host CPU main processing>
FIG. 44 is a flowchart for explaining main processing by the image control board.
When power is supplied from the power supply substrate 170, a system reset occurs in the host CPU 151, and the host CPU 151 performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S901, the host CPU 151 performs initialization processing. In this processing, the host CPU 151 reads the main processing program from the host ROM 153 and instructs initialization of various modules of the host CPU 151 and the VDP 200 in response to power on.

In step S 902, the host CPU 151 performs effect pattern specification command analysis processing for analyzing the effect pattern specification command (command stored in the reception buffer of the host RAM 152) transmitted from the effect control board 120.
When the image control board 150 receives a command transmitted from the effect control board 120, a command reception interrupt process of the image control board 150 (not shown) is generated, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer. Thereafter, analysis processing of the command received in step S902 is performed.

In the effect pattern specification command analysis process, it is confirmed whether or not the effect pattern specification command is stored in the reception buffer. If the effect pattern designation command is not stored in the reception buffer, the process proceeds to step S903 as it is.
If the effect pattern specification command is stored in the reception buffer, a new effect pattern specification command is read, and one or more animation groups to be executed are determined based on the read effect pattern specification command, and the respective animations are determined. An animation pattern is determined from the group (see FIG. 47). Then, when the animation pattern is determined, the read presentation pattern designation command is deleted from the transmission buffer.

In step S 903, the host CPU 151 performs animation control processing. In this process, the addresses of various animation scenes are updated based on the "scene switching counter", "wait frame", "frame counter" updated in step S921 described later, and the animation pattern determined in step S902. Do.
In step S904, the host CPU 151 displays the display list from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address according to the priority (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs. Are generated (see FIG. 47). Then, when the generation of the display list is completed, the host CPU 151 outputs the display list to the VDP 200. The display list to be output here will be described later with reference to FIG.
The display list output here is stored in the display list storage area 156 a of the VRAM 156 via the CPU I / F 203 in the VDP 200.

In step S905, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not the FB switching flag = 01.
Here, as described later with reference to FIG. 45B, the FB switching flag is an FB if the previous display list drawing is completed in the V blank interrupt every 1/60 second (about 16.6 ms), as will be described later. The switching flag becomes 01. That is, in step S905, it is determined whether the previous drawing has been completed.
If the FB switching flag = 01 (Yes in step S905), the host CPU 151 shifts the processing to step S906, and if the FB switching flag = 00 (No in step S905), the host CPU 151 waits until the FB switching flag = 01 do.

In step S906, the host CPU 151 sets the FB switching flag = 00 (turns off the FB switching flag), and shifts the processing to step S906.
In step S 907, the host CPU 151 performs drawing execution start processing.
In this process, in order to instruct the VDP 200 to execute drawing on the display list that has already been output, drawing execution start data is set in the drawing register. That is, execution of drawing on the display list output in S904 is instructed.
Thereafter, the processes of steps S902 to S907 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt shown in FIG. 45 is generated.

<Interrupt processing of image control board>
The interrupt process of the image control board 150 will be described with reference to FIG.
The interrupt process of the image control board 150 includes at least a drawing end interrupt process performed by inputting a drawing end interrupt signal and a V blank interrupt process performed by inputting a V blank interrupt signal. There is.

<Host CPU drawing end interrupt processing>
FIG. 45 (a) is a flow chart for explaining the drawing end interruption process by the image control board.
When drawing of a frame (one frame) of a predetermined unit is completed, the VDP 200 outputs a drawing end interrupt signal to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I / F 203.
When the host CPU 151 receives a drawing end interrupt signal from the VDP 200, it executes a drawing end interrupt process.
In the drawing end interrupt process, in step S911, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag = 01 (turns on the drawing end flag), and ends the present drawing end interrupt process. That is, the drawing end flag is turned on each time drawing is completed.

<Host CPU V blank interrupt processing>
FIG. 45 (b) is a flow chart for explaining the V blank interrupt processing by the image control board.
The VDP 200 outputs a V blank interrupt signal (vertical synchronization signal) to the host CPU 151 via the CPU I / F 203 every 1/60 seconds (about 16.6 ms).
When the host CPU 151 receives a V blank interrupt signal from the VDP 200, the host CPU 151 executes V blank interrupt processing.

In step S921, the host CPU 151 performs processing of updating various counters of "scene switching counter", "wait frame", and "frame counter".
In step S922, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not the drawing end flag = 01. That is, it is determined whether drawing of a frame of a predetermined unit is completed.
If the drawing end flag = 01 (Yes in step S922), the host CPU 151 shifts the processing to step S923, and if the drawing end flag = 01 (No in step S922), the current V blank interrupt processing is ended. Do. That is, even if the V blank interrupt signal is input, the process after step S923 is not performed unless the drawing is completed.

In step S 923, the host CPU 151 sets the drawing end flag = 00 (turns off the drawing end flag).
In step S 924, the host CPU 151 gives the memory controller 209 of the VDP 200 an instruction to switch between the “display frame buffer” and the “drawing frame buffer”.
In step S925, the host CPU 151 sets FB switching flag = 01 (turns on the FB switching flag), cancels the standby state in step S905 (see FIG. 44), and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Do.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47, a method of determining an animation pattern and a method of generating a display list will be described.

<Anime Pattern>
FIG. 46 is an example of an animation pattern for displaying animation of a presentation pattern.
As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the animation patterns are grouped by objects and scenes to be displayed on the image display device 31, and a background group for displaying a background animation and an animation of a character used for notice A are displayed. Notice group A to play, notice B group to display animation of character used for notice B, reach group to display animation of reach character, effect pattern group to display animation of effect pattern 35, big hit There are a large number of groups such as a jackpot effect group ... for displaying animation of the effect. Then, a large number of animation patterns are stored in the host ROM 153 in association with each group.
The host CPU 151 determines one or more animation groups to be executed based on the rendering pattern designation command received from the sub CPU 121, and determines animation patterns from the respective animation groups.

  46 (b) to 46 (e) are animation patterns determined when the variation pattern designation command (E6H07H) corresponding to the variation pattern 7 (the variation pattern 7 of the special symbol of 10 seconds) shown in FIG. 13 is received. An example is shown.

  When the host CPU 151 receives the effect pattern designation command (A1H09H) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command (E6H07H) of the fluctuation pattern 7, the host CPU 151 selects four of the background group, the notice A group, the notice B group, and the effect pattern group. One group is determined, and an animation pattern 1 is determined from the background group, an animation pattern 11 from the notice A group, an animation pattern 21 from the notice B group, and an animation pattern 501 from the effect pattern group.

Here, as the animation pattern, as shown in (b) to (e) of FIG. 46, combinations of animation scene information, display order of each animation scene information, and the like are stored.
For example, in the effect pattern group animation pattern 501 shown in FIG. 46 (e), the animation scene 501 is executed first, and the animation scene 511 is executed second.
The host RAM 151 has a "scene switching counter" updated every frame, and when the scene switching counter measures "540" while the first animation scene 501 is being executed, the second animation The animation scene is switched to the scene 511. Then, when the scene switching counter measures “60” while executing the second animation scene 511, the animation scene of the effect pattern group animation pattern 501 ends.
Note that “one frame” is the update timing of the image display apparatus (the update timing of the vertical synchronization signal), and one frame is updated every 1/60 seconds (about 16.6 ms). That is, 60 frames are measured in one second.

In each animation scene, animation scene information is stored, and a weight frame (i.e., display time) updated for each frame, target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite's Display information such as display position, transfer destination address, etc., drawing method, etc. is stored.
For example, in the animation display, in the animation scene 501 shown in FIG. 46 (e), the first to fourth symbols continue to be displayed at predetermined coordinates up to 20 frames (about 0.33 seconds). After that, the first to fourth symbols continue to be displayed at 15 frames (about 0.25 seconds) at different coordinates. Similarly, if the first to fourth symbols continue to be displayed at different coordinates until the predetermined frame, an animation is displayed in which the first to fourth symbols move and are displayed. be able to.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 46 (b) to (e), the animation pattern 1 of the background group, the animation pattern 11 from the notice A group, the animation pattern 21 from the notice B group, and the animation from the effect pattern group A plurality of animation patterns with the pattern 501 are determined, and animations of these animation patterns are executed in parallel.
That is, in the display area of the image display device 31, the images BG1 and BG2 continue to be displayed as a background from the start to the end of the animation pattern, and two seconds (120 frames) from the start of the animation pattern An image for animating display is displayed for 3 seconds (180 frames), and 3 seconds (180 frames) from the start of the animation pattern, an image for animating the preliminary display of character B is displayed for 4 seconds (240 frames). Furthermore, the image for performing the animation of the normal variation display of the effect pattern is performed for 9 seconds (540 frames), and then the image for performing the animation of the temporary stop display for 1 second (60 frames) is displayed.
Note that these images will be displayed overlappingly in the display area of the image display device 31, and the image drawn first will be overwritten and erased by the image drawn later. The method of generating this image will be described in the display list described later.

<Display list>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a display list composed of drawing control commands.
When the host CPU 151 determines the animation pattern as shown in FIG. 46, the host CPU 151 generates a display list for each predetermined unit of frame (every frame), and outputs the generated display list to the VDP 200.
Here, as for the method of generating the display list, the host CPU 151 follows the contents of the animation scene in the current number of frames based on the “frame counter” indicating the current frame and the determined animation pattern (animation scene). The display list in the current number of frames is generated by generating the drawing control command in accordance with the order of priority (drawing order) of each animation group.

For example, as the priority of the animation group shown in FIGS. 46 (b) to (e), data of the lowest priority 10 is associated with the background group, and data of the priority 9 is associated with the notice A group. The notice B group is associated with priority 8 data, the jackpot effect group is associated with priority 2 data, and the effect symbol group is associated with highest priority 1 data It shall be.
Then, as shown in FIGS. 46 (b) to 46 (e), the animation pattern 1 of the background group, the animation pattern 11 from the notice A group, the animation pattern 21 from the notice B group, and the effect pattern group It is assumed that a plurality of animation patterns with the animation pattern 501 are determined.

Next, from animation pattern 1 of the animation group with the lowest priority (background group), drawing control commands according to the contents of the animation scene in the current frame counter (the current number of frames) are sequentially generated and determined. When the drawing control commands up to the animation group with highest priority among the animation groups (demonstration symbol group) are generated, the drawing end command is finally generated to complete the display list as shown in FIG.
Such a display list is generated by program processing while referring to the necessary data by the host CPU 151.

  As described above, the host CPU 151 outputs to the VDP 200 the display list in which the drawing control command group is grouped for each predetermined frame (one frame), and the drawing circuit 207 in the VDP 200 performs specific drawing processing. The processing load on the host CPU 151 can be reduced.

Next, an outline of the lamp control board 140 will be briefly described.
In the lamp control board 140, when a command for effect is received from the effect control board 120, the effect product device operation program is read based on the received effect command, and the effect product device 32 is operated and controlled. At the same time, the effect lighting device control program is read based on the received effect command, and the effect lighting device 33 is controlled.
In the lamp control board 140, when the command for the effect button is received from the image control board 130 via the effect control board 120, the effect button operating program is read out based on the received command for the effect button, and the effect button Control 8

<Configuration of voice control circuit>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the configuration of the audio control circuit according to the present embodiment.
The sound control circuit 300 shown in FIG. 48 includes a sound source ROM 400 for storing various sound data (rendering sound, system sound) as compressed data, and various control commands related to sound output, such as a sound output command and an error sound output. It is connected to the host CPU 151 and the like of the image control circuit 150 which inputs a command to the voice control circuit 300.

The host CPU 151 included in the image control board 150 controls the audio control circuit 300 (audio processing sound output command including audio required for the fluctuation performance based on the fluctuation performance pattern specified by the performance pattern specification command input from the sub CPU 121 Input to the control unit 301).
Also, the host CPU 151 performs an audio control circuit on an error sound output command based on various switch detection information (door open information, counter full information, ball jam information, unauthorized radio wave detection information) transmitted from the main control board 110. 300 (voice control unit 301).
The voice control circuit 300 performs processing on voice data stored in the sound source ROM 400 in accordance with a control command input from the host CPU 151, and performs processing to input to at least one voice output device (speaker) 34 and output as voice. .

  The audio control circuit 300 is associated with a plurality of (for example, 40) audio channels (ch0 to ch39) including the decoding unit 310 and the channel volume control unit 311, and audio data and volume according to control commands input from the host CPU 151. An audio control unit 301 that inputs control commands (control commands for decoding unit, volume control commands) to an audio channel, a mixer 302 that mixes and outputs audio signals output from each of audio channels 0ch to 39ch, and a mixer 302 An audio signal processor 303 for performing predetermined audio processing (equalizing, effect processing, panning, loop, etc.) on the signal output from the circuit, an operational amplifier 304 as an amplifying device, and an audio signal as a digital signal as an analog signal Convert to an audio output device (speaker A D / A converter unit 305 to be output to 34, and a.

The sound source ROM 400 is digital data obtained by compressing a plurality of (for example, 4096 types of) voice data (phrase data) including system sounds such as background sound (BGM), effect sound for sound effects, and error sound used in a gaming machine It is stored as data.
As a compression method of audio data, for example, a modified discrete cosine transform or the like can be used, but it is not limited thereto, and audio data may not necessarily be compressed.

Of a plurality of audio channels (for example, 0ch to 39ch) included in the audio control circuit, for example, 6 audio channels of 0ch to 5ch are reserved for system sound (error sound) and may be used for effect sound I can not do it.
The audio control unit 301 selects an available audio channel from the remaining 6ch to 39ch audio channels, and uses it for reproduction of audio data instructed from the host CPU 151.

When an error such as the opening of a door occurs in the gaming machine, the volume of all the effect sounds is reduced or stopped to preferentially generate an error sound as a system sound.
By clearly distinguishing the plurality of audio channels provided in the audio control circuit 300 for the system sound and for the presentation sound as described above, it is not necessary to consider on which audio channel the presentation sound is being output, Since control may be performed to lower the volume of the audio channel that can be used for sound or to stop output, the processing can be simplified and the audio channel can be efficiently used.

The audio channel will be described in detail.
Decoding units 310-0 to 310-39 included in each of the audio channels 0ch to 39ch read (compressed) audio data from the sound source ROM 400 in accordance with the control command for decoding unit input from the audio control unit 301 and perform decoding processing.
The channel volume control unit 311 included in each of the audio channels 0ch to 39ch outputs an output volume for the expanded audio data input from the decoding unit 310 based on the volume control command input from the audio control unit 301, and Control fade in / fade out etc.).
In fade-in, the channel volume control unit 311 is designated with the values of the initial volume and the target volume and the time from the initial volume to the target volume.
The fade out designates the start timing and the target volume to the channel volume control unit 311.

The host CPU 151 and the audio control unit 301 periodically acquire information from the audio channels 0ch to 39ch, and constantly grasps the processing status in these audio channels.
More specifically, the host CPU 151 and the audio control unit 301 periodically acquire and hold status information of the decoding unit 310 and the channel volume control unit 311 provided for each audio channel.
Since the host CPU 151 causes the audio control unit 301 to output an audio by specifying an audio channel, which audio channel and which rendering sound and system sound are being output, the volume of each audio channel, the remaining reproduction time, Naturally I understand the situation of fade in and fade out.

The status information of the decoding unit 310 in each audio channel includes, for example, “reproduction status”, “priority”, and “sound number”.
The "reproduction status" is information indicating whether or not the audio is reproduced on the audio channel, and there is "reproducing" or "standby".

"Priority" is the priority of the audio being reproduced on the audio channel, and this is preset as "high", "medium" or "low" in the audio management table (FIG. 52) described later .
Basically, for the player, the background sound with little information indicating the game result or the game state is low in priority, and the operation sound of the effect button, the notice effect sound, the sound effect and the like are set to have high priority.

The "sound number" is a number for specifying the audio to be reproduced / reproduced on each audio channel.
In the voice management table (FIG. 52) described later, each voice data is managed in association with the “sound number”, and the host CPU 151 instructs the voice control unit 301 about the sound number of the voice to be reproduced. . As a result, the sound to be read from the sound source ROM 400 and reproduced from the sound control unit 301 to the decoding unit 310 of each sound channel is specified by the “sound number”.

The status information of the channel volume control unit 311 in each audio channel includes, for example, “volume” and “fade status”.
"Volume" is the volume of the audio currently playing on the audio channel (e.g., a percentage of the maximum volume (master volume)).
In addition, “Fade status” indicates whether fade-in (FI) / fade-out (FO) is set to the audio currently being played on the audio channel, or whether they are completed if set. Contains information on

For example, “fade timer 5” indicates that FI / FO performed using 5 seconds is incomplete.
"Fade timer 0" indicates that FI / FO is not specified or has been completed.

The status information of all the audio channels 0ch to 39ch includes information of “play status”, “priority”, “sound number”, “volume”, and “fade status” for each audio channel.
The status information of all audio channels is, for example, as shown below.

Audio channel ch6: Standby audio channel ch7: During playback, priority "high", sound number 11, current volume 90%, fade timer 0 audio channel ch8: during playback, priority "high", sound number 11, current volume 90%, fade timer 0 audio channel ch9: priority during playback, priority "low", sound number 33, current volume 70%, fade timer 0 audio channel ch10: during playback, priority "medium", sound number 72, current volume 80%, fade timer 0 ..... audio channel ch 39: waiting

[Host CPU] The voice control processing performed by the image control board included in the gaming machine of the present embodiment using a voice control circuit will be described in detail below.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart for describing the audio control processing by the image control board.
The image control board 150 performs not only the audio output process but also the image data to be output to the image display device 31. Here, the audio control process for outputting the presentation sound and the system sound to the audio output device 34 will be particularly described. .
The process shown in FIG. 49 is a main process (for audio processing) by the host CPU 151 of the image control board 150, and is a control process for the audio control circuit 300.

First, the host CPU 151 performs master volume setting processing in step S1001.
The master volume setting process is a process for setting a master volume value of the gaming machine in accordance with the operation of the volume switch SW 280 or the cross key 40 (right / left key) by the player or the staff of the game arcade.

Here, the volume setting process in the gaming machine will be outlined.
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an initial value of “master volume value” is set by the volume switching SW 280. This is basically an operation that can be performed only by the game arcade staff, and the volume switching SW 280 is often installed at a position where the player can not operate, such as the back of the gaming machine. The volume switching SW 280 is often configured by a dip switch.
Also, the player adjusts (changes) the "master volume value" from the set initial value using the left key and the right key of the cross key 40 (FIG. 2) according to his / her convenience or preference. I can do it. This work can be performed when the gaming machine is waiting for customers.

The adjustment work of the master volume using the cross key 40 may be performed during the change of the special symbol.
However, the adjustment operation can not be performed within 15 frames of the fluctuation start and at the fluctuation stop (when the symbol determination command is received).

The “master volume value” is a comprehensive volume setting value given to all of a plurality of audio channels included in the audio control circuit 300, but in the audio control circuit 300 according to the present embodiment, it is included in each audio channel. It is possible to give a sub-volume value obtained by adding volume adjustment to the master volume value to the above-described channel volume control unit 311 (input a different volume value only for a specific audio channel).
Therefore, the relative volume difference (volume ratio) between the audio channels can be adjusted, and the important audio can be enhanced by outputting a louder sound as compared to the other audio.

  The "master volume value" can be switched from "1" to "10" by one step using the volume switching SW 280 or the left and right keys, and depending on the volume switching SW 280 (FIG. 4), "high" in the range, It is possible to set four volume levels of "medium", "small" and "eco" as the initial value of the master volume value.

When the volume switching SW 280 is switched to "high", the master volume value is "10". When switched to "medium", the master volume value is switched to "7", "small", "eco". The master volume value "4" is set.
When “master volume value is set” to “eco”, the effect illumination device 33 is turned off while the gaming machine is in the wait-for-waiting state, and the image display device 31 of the image display device 31 is not operated. Set the brightness low.
The “master volume value” set using the volume switching SW 280 is called “hard volume value” in this embodiment.
When the sound volume switching SW 280 is operated when the gaming machine is not energized, the host CPU 151 sets a hard volume value according to the output value of the sound volume switching SW 280 at the time of launching the gaming machine. The hard volume value is stored in the host RAM 152 of the image control board 150.

Also, when waiting for a guest or when the special symbol fluctuates, use the left and right keys to change the master volume value (initial value) set by the volume switch SW 280 to the player's favorite volume from “1” Adjust between 10 ".
This adjusted master volume value is called "soft volume value" in the present embodiment.
When the initial value by the volume switching SW 280 is “eco”, the player can not perform adjustment using the cross key 40.
The master volume value adjusted using the left and right keys is stored in the host RAM 152 of the image control board 150.

Referring back to the flowchart of FIG. 49, the host CPU 151 performs system sound setting processing in step S1002.
This is setting / output processing of an error sound (system sound) according to an instruction from the upper board (main control board 110, effect control board 120). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, the host CPU 151 performs effect sound setting processing in step S1003.
This is setting / output processing of the effect sound according to the instruction from the upper board (effect control board 120). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, in step S1004, the host CPU 151 performs processing on the currently output voice.
This is a control process for the sound currently output by the sound control circuit 300. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
Next, the host CPU 151 performs command output processing for outputting a control command to the voice control circuit 300.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart for explaining master volume setting processing by the image control board.
In step S1101, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not the change of the hard volume using the volume switch SW 280 has been performed.
If it is determined that the hard volume value has been changed (Yes in step S1101), the host CPU 151 sets the changed hard volume value as a master volume value in step S1102.

If it is determined that the hard volume value has not been changed (No in step S1101), the host CPU 151 determines whether the change of the software volume value using the cross key (left and right key) 40 has been performed in step S1103. .
If it is determined that the soft volume value has been changed (Yes in step S1103), the host CPU 151 sets the changed soft volume value as a master volume value in step S1102.
If the software volume value has not been changed (No in step S1103), the host CPU 151 ends the current volume setting process.

Next, setting processing of a system sound (error sound) and an effect sound by the image control board in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the host CPU 151 of the image control board 150 is required based on the fluctuation effect pattern specified by the effect pattern specification command supplied from the effect control board 120 which is the upper board. The voice is selected from the voice management table, and the voice control circuit 300 is instructed to output it.
In addition, for the error sound, the necessary sound is detected based on various sensor detection results supplied from the main control board 110 (Dish full detection result, door open detection result, ball clogging detection result, fraud radio wave detection result). It is selected from the voice management table and instructed to the voice control circuit 300 to output it.

A voice used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
51 and 52 are diagrams showing an example of the sound management table provided in the image control board.
In the voice management table shown in FIG. 51, each system sound is managed in association with a sound number.
Further, in the voice management table shown in FIG. 52, the effect sound, its priority, and the type of stereo / monaural are associated with the sound number and managed.
The priority is not usually considered particularly, but as will be described later, it is a degree for determining the voice to be preferentially reproduced when the voice channel of the voice control circuit 300 is exhausted. .

  In the table of FIG. 51, the sound number 1 is an error sound emitted when the door is in the open state, and the sound number 2 is emitted when an illegal radio wave is detected by the magnetic sensor 50 installed on the game board Error sound. Also, the sound number 3 is an error sound emitted when the ball clogs, and the sound number 4 is an error sound emitted when the storage bowl for the game balls is full.

When the occurrence of these events is detected by various sensors connected to the main control board 110, detection signals are input from the main control board 110 to the image control board 150 via the effect control board 120.
As a result, the host CPU 151 selects a sound number according to various events occurring in the gaming machine, and transmits an output command to the voice control board 300.

In addition, priority is set to these error sounds according to the importance of the error, and priority is set to "high" for opening of the door that leads to or is caused by fraud or fraudulent radio wave detection. It is done.
Although "ball clogging" is an important error, its priority is set to "medium" because it is less important than fraud.
The notification when the storage bin for game balls is full is clearly lower in importance than the above, so the priority is "low".

The error notification is controlled so that only one high importance error sound can be heard.
For example, when the door open is detected when the fullness notification (importance "low") of the sound number 4 is generated, the error sound of the sound number 1 is generated and the error sound of the sound number 4 Mute the When the door open state is released, the error sound of the sound number 1 is stopped, and the volume of the error sound of the sound number 4 is returned to the original.
When a tone number having a priority of "high" is generated, even if an event having a priority lower than that occurs, no error tone is newly generated for the event.
If events of the same priority occur in parallel, an error sound is output for an event that occurred later.

Further, in the table of FIG. 52, sound numbers 11 to 20 are, for example, background sound (BGM) of stereo sound outputted during a period (during fluctuation) in which a special symbol is variably displayed.
In particular, the sound number 11 is BGM of stereo sound reproduced before the start of the reach effect in the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation effect patterns 1 and 2.

Further, the sound number 12 is BGM of stereo sound reproduced after the reach effect start in the change effect corresponding to the change effect patterns 1 and 2.
In gaming machines, it is often the case that the background music is different before and after reaching the reach. Of course, the same BGM may be set before and after the start of reach.
Such BGM basically does not strongly suggest the game result or the game state to the player, and therefore the priority is set low.

The sound number 13 is BGM reproduced before the start of the reach effect in the change effect corresponding to the change effect patterns 3 and 4.
The sound number 14 is BGM reproduced after the reach effect start in the change effect corresponding to the change effect patterns 3 and 4.

Further, the sound number 15 is BGM reproduced during the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern 9 (normal fluctuation not including the reach).
The sound number 16 to the sound number 18 are BGM reproduced in a specific effect, and the priority is set high. These effect sounds will be described in detail later.

The sound numbers 21 to 23 are BGM of stereo sound reproduced during the jackpot game.
Since the BGM during the jackpot is not a voice that basically provides special information to the player, the priority as the voice is set low.
The jackpot BGM is divided into three parts, the sound number 21 is an A melody part of the jackpot BGM, the sound number 22 is a B melody part, and the sound number 23 is a rust part.

The sound number 31 is an effect sound to be reproduced when the player operates the effect button 8 (pressing once) in a falling branch effect (described later) performed during a specific reach effect.
Since this is basically a single sound and the reproduction time is very short, monaural sound is sufficient because it does not require much thickness for sound.
However, since the on-the-off branch effect using the effect button 8 is a small opportunity that the player can directly participate in the effect, and the effect is great, the priority of the sound is set high.

The sound number 32 is an effect sound to be reproduced when the player operates the effect button 8 (continuous hit) in a falling branch effect (described later) performed during a specific reach effect.
This is basically monophonic sound, the reproduction time is very short, and monaural sound is sufficient because it does not require much thickness for sound.
However, since the on-the-off branch effect using the effect button 8 is a small opportunity that the player can directly participate in the effect, and the effect is great, the priority of the sound is set high.

The sound number 41 is a sound effect used to dynamically add an effect to BGM during a change effect, particularly during a reach, to improve the effect. It is desirable to set the priority higher.
The sound number 42 is, for example, a sound effect generated at the time of mode transition presentation after a small hit.
The sound number 51 is the effect pattern change start sound (monaural) for notifying the player of the change start of the effect pattern 35 in the change effect, and the sound number 52 is the change stop sound (monaural) of the effect pattern 35 is there. These priorities are medium.

  The sound numbers 61 to 69 are voices such as voices of characters used in advance notice effects described later, in particular, group notices and the like. Although they are mutually related voices, they are voices generated by different characters, so they are different voices.

The sound numbers 71 to 80 are operation sounds emitted when adjusting the volume using the cross key 40.
As will be described later, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when adjusting the volume using the cross key 40, the scale goes up when the right key (volume up) is pressed, and the scale goes down when the left key (volume down) is pressed. Sound is supposed to be emitted.
Therefore, different operation sounds corresponding to the above-mentioned volume "1" to volume "10" are prepared.

The sound numbers 91 to 100 are winning sounds that are emitted when the game ball enters the special winning opening and the starting opening.
In the case of consecutive wins such as during a big hit, multiple types of voices are prepared to be scales such as Doremi.

The sound number 110 is an "over winning notification sound" which informs the player of an over winning when there is a winning over the prescribed number (9) per round during the big hit game. is there.
The sound number 120 is BGM (during non-reach) -A1 before start of reach effect used when the specific effect pattern and the effect mode are the first effect mode (described later).
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, different rendering motifs are used for each of the rendering modes, and BGM is also different for each of the rendering modes.

The sound number 121 is BGM (during non-reach)-BGM (during non-reach) before the start of reach production different from A1 used during the specific effect pattern and the effect mode is the second effect mode (described later)- It is A2.
The sound number 122 is BGM (during non-reach)-A3 before the start of reach effect used when the specific effect pattern and the effect mode are the third effect mode (described later).
The sound number 123 is a common BGM (during reach)-A used in all of the first to third effect modes in the specific effect pattern.

The sound number 130 is the reach notification effect sound 1 used in the first effect mode.
The reach notification effect sound is an effect sound for notifying the player of the start of the reach effect as described later, and this is also different for each effect mode.
The sound number 131 is the reach notification effect sound 2 used in the second effect mode.
The sound number 132 is the reach notification effect sound 3 used in the third effect mode.
In addition, the BGM of sound numbers 120 to 122 shown in FIG. 52 and the reach notification effect sounds 1 to 3 of sound numbers 130 to 132 are not limited to the fluctuation effect patterns 1 and 2 serving as a big hit, but the fluctuation producing pattern 10 serving as a loss It goes without saying that it can be used in 11 and so on.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing system sound setting processing by the image control board.
In step S1201, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not various error detection signals are input from the main control board 110 (main CPU 111) (whether an error has occurred).
If it is determined that an error detection signal has been input (Yes in step S1201), the host CPU 151 sets 1 in the error detection flag in the host RAM 152 in step S1202, and in step S1203, is there any effect sound currently being output? It is determined whether or not.

If there is an effect sound currently being output (Yes in step S1203), the host CPU 151 saves the current master volume value in the host RAM 152 and sets a new master volume value reduced by a predetermined amount in step S1204. (A volume value reset command to lower the volume of the effect sound is set in the transmission buffer).
That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when outputting an error sound, the volume of the effect sound is reduced to make it easier to hear the error sound.

Next, in step S1205, the host CPU 151 sets an error sound output command in the transmission buffer, and ends the system sound setting process.
If it is determined in step S1203 that there is no effect sound being output (No in step S1203), the host CPU 151 shifts the processing to step S1205 and sets an "error sound output command" in the transmission buffer.
If it is determined in step S1201 that there is no input of an error detection signal (No in step S1201), the host CPU 151 sets an error detection flag to 0 in step S1206, and an error occurred in the gaming machine in step S1207. Is determined (whether an error detection flag has changed from 1 to 0) or not.

When it is determined that the error occurring in the gaming machine has been eliminated (Yes in step S1207), the host CPU 151 restores the master volume value to the master volume value stored in step S1204 (volume of effect sound In step S1209, the "error sound stop command" is set in the transmission buffer, and the current system sound setting process is ended.
If it is determined that the error has not been resolved (an error has not occurred) (No in step S1207), the host CPU 151 ends the current system sound setting process.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an effect sound setting process by the image control board.
In step S1301, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not there is a rendering sound output instruction (transmission of the rendering pattern designation command shown in FIGS. 36 and 37) from the sub CPU 121.
If it is determined that there is a rendering sound output instruction (Yes in step S1301), the host CPU 151 analyzes a rendering pattern designation command in step S1302.

Next, in step S1303, the host CPU 151 determines a sound number to be specified for the sound control circuit 300 based on the variation effect pattern specified by the effect pattern specification command.
A sound number may be designated in the effect pattern designation command itself.

Next, in step S1304, the host CPU 151 confirms the master volume value stored in the host RAM 152.
Next, in step S1305, the host CPU 151 performs channel selection processing described later.
The master volume value stored in the host RAM 152 is confirmed.
Further, in step S1306, the host CPU 151 sets a "production sound output command" including the sound number determined in step S1303, the audio channel selected in step S1306, and the volume based on the master volume value confirmed in step S1304 in the transmission buffer. And causes the sound control circuit 300 to reproduce the effect sound.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart for describing the process of outputting voice by the image control board.
In step S1401, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not there is an effect sound currently being output by the audio control circuit 300.
If it is determined that there is a voice being output (Yes in step S1401), the host CPU 151 determines in step S1402 whether or not the master volume value has been changed by the volume setting process (FIG. 49: step S1001).

If the master volume value has been changed (Yes in step S1402), the host CPU 151 sets a volume value reset command based on the changed master volume value in the transmission buffer in step S1403 and transmits the volume control command to the voice control circuit 300. Send.
If there is no sound being output (No at step S1401) or if the master volume value has not been changed (No at step S1402), the host CPU 151 ends the current output processing.
The change of the software volume value confirmed in step S1103 can be performed only when waiting for a customer.

If it is determined in step S1402 that the master volume value has not been changed (No in step S1402), the host CPU 151 needs volume adjustment, fade-in, and fade-out in the effect sound currently being output in step 1404 Determine if there are any.
If there is such an effect sound (Yes in step S1404), the host CPU 151 sets a volume value reset command for the necessary audio channel in step S1405, and ends the current output processing.

<Auto channel processing>
FIG. 56 is a diagram for describing an audio channel selection process by the image control board.
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the audio control circuit 300 has 40 audio channels, and can simultaneously reproduce up to 40 audios.

When reproducing and outputting a rendering sound, the host CPU 151 is a vacant channel (no sound is output) out of 34 channels excluding 6 audio channels reserved for a system sound (error sound). And an effect sound output command including information of the selected sound channel, sound number, and volume is input to the sound control circuit 300.
The voice control unit 301 that controls the voice control circuit 300 inputs voice data instructed by the host CPU 151 into a designated voice channel decoding unit and starts reproduction.

The audio channels provided by the audio control circuit 300 are such that adjacent audio channels are used as one audio channel pair.
For example, as shown in FIG. 56, audio channel ch0 and audio channel ch1 are used as audio channel pair 1, audio channel ch2 and audio channel ch3 are used as audio channel 2, audio channel ch4 and audio channel ch5 are audio channels Used as a pair 3.
One "audio channel" is used to reproduce one monaural data, and one "audio channel pair" is used to reproduce one set of stereo data.

  The stereo data is divided into an audio channel for the right speaker and an audio channel for the left speaker, and the player recognizes the audio channel as a spread stereo audio by simultaneously reproducing each audio channel from the respective speakers. Ru.

  Stereo data is audio information for outputting one audio by plural audio data, and monaural data is audio information for outputting one audio by single audio data.

Furthermore, it is also possible to output surround sound using an "audio channel group" consisting of three or more audio channels. In that case, in addition to the left and right speakers, it is necessary to separately provide speakers corresponding to the number of audio channels.
Also, surround sound is audio data divided according to the number of speakers.
That is, an audio channel group (pair) in which a plurality of audio channels are associated is set in advance as an audio channel, and the audio control circuit 300 outputs stereo audio using the associated audio channel group (pair). Output monaural sound using one of the sound channels (pair).
That is, the host CPU 151 sets stereo sound to the sound channel pair (group), and sets monaural sound to one sound channel of the sound channel pair (group).

In the audio control circuit 300 of the present embodiment, stereo data can not be output across audio channel pairs.
For example, as shown in FIG. 56, stereo audio (L) and stereo audio (R) can be reproduced and output using audio channel ch16 and audio channel ch17 that constitute audio channel pair 9, but audio channel pair 5 can be used. It can not be reproduced and output using the audio channel ch9 contained in the audio channel 10 contained in the audio channel pair 10 contained in the audio channel pair 6.

Therefore, in the case of newly outputting stereo sound in the case of FIG. 56, the host CPU 151 is not limited to the audio channel pair 6 (audio channel ch10, audio channel ch11) etc. for which stereo audio has already been output. There is no selection of channel pair 4 and channel pair 5 in which monaural sound is output in the channel of.
Channel pair 7 and channel pair 9 are selected, for which any audio channel is available.

Further, in the case of FIG. 56, in the case of newly outputting monaural sound, the host CPU 151 outputs the monaural sound on the other channel of the channel pair that is outputting monaural sound on one of the audio channels. For example, the audio channel ch7 and the audio channel ch8 correspond to this.
This is because stereo sound can be reproduced and output only by one channel pair as described above.

Since it is impossible to output stereo sound with a channel pair in which monaural sound has already been reproduced and output in one sound channel, for example, when monaural sound is input to sound channel ch14 of currently open channel pair 8, it is Above, there will be one less channel pair that can output stereo sound.
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, by inputting a new monaural sound to the other channel pair outputting a monaural sound on the other hand, the sound channel can be efficiently used without wasting the sound channel. I am trying to use it.

The case where all the audio channels are filled will be described.
The host CPU 151 outputs the voice with the lowest priority among the voices being played back, when there is a request for new voice output when all the available voice channels for the effect sound are embedded. Input a new voice to the voice channel.
Since only one voice can be output in one voice channel, low priority voices that were previously output are stopped, and newly requested voice is output from the voice channel.
Even if the priority of the newly requested voice is lower than the currently output voice, the new voice output is prioritized. However, if the newly requested voice has the lowest priority, the request may be discarded without outputting.

  When multiple voices with low priority are output, the host CPU 151 inputs new voice to the voice channel outputting the voice with a short remaining reproduction time.

In the case of the present embodiment, when the voices of the same sound number are continuously reproduced, the host CPU 151 inputs the voice to the same voice channel.
The case where the sound of the same sound number is continuously reproduced is, for example, a case where the player is made to continuously hit the effect button 8 in the button effect during reach.
In the button continuous hitting effect, when the effect button 8 is hit continuously, the effect button continuous hitting sound (sound number 32) shown in the management table of FIG. 52 is generated.
When the production button 8 is hit continuously, processing to generate the production button continuous hitting sound (sound number 32) continuously is required, but when all voices are input to different vacant voice channels, the vacant channels are exhausted immediately. become.

Further, in the present embodiment, when there is no empty channel, basically, the newly input voice is preferentially generated, so the voice (rendering sound) being output from another voice channel is also generated. , It is overwritten by the effect button depression sound newly input.
That is, since only one voice can be output in one voice channel, the previously output voice is stopped, and a newly requested (input) voice (rendering button depression sound) is output from the voice channel. Be done.
As a result, other effect sounds other than the effect button pressing sound are not output, and may be unnatural as effects.

Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the same sound number is given to the voice of the same content, and when the same sound number is continuously input, the sound is continuously input to the same audio channel. .
As a result, the limited number of audio channels provided in the audio control circuit 300 can be efficiently used.
In addition, when the same voice (rendering button continuous hit tone) is input to different voice channels and played back and output, the respective voices overlap and the player hears through whispers, but the same voice channel is input and overwritten while being overwritten Such an inconvenience can be resolved by outputting (while stopping the output of the effect button pressing sound input earlier).

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the effect that the level gauge 39 extends each time the production button 8 is continuously hit, the effect button continuous hitting sound (sound number 32) is generated until the level gauge 39 becomes MAX. After the level gauge 39 becomes MAX, a different presentation button continuous hitting sound (sound number 33) is generated.
As a result, it is possible to effectively inform the player that the level gauge 39 has become MAX.
Also in this case, if the effect button continuous hitting sound of the sound number 32 and the effect button continuous hitting sound of the sound number 33 are input to the same voice channel, the voice channel can be used more efficiently.

The process of inputting the same kind of sound into the same voice channel is also performed on the winning sounds (FIG. 52: sound numbers 91 to 100) to be output when the gaming ball wins the starting opening or the big winning opening. obtain.
That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, sounds from "do" of sound number 91 to sound number 97 "shi" are prepared as winning sounds, and winning sounds of different sound numbers are generated in the order of winning. It has become.

In this case, for example, when a large number of game balls win a large winning opening during an extremely short period of time during a jackpot game or the like, if all the winning sounds relating to these are output from different voice channels, the number is limited. Audio channel is saturated.
Therefore, particularly during a big hit game, winning sounds of different contents generated continuously are regarded as the same kind of sound, and input to the same sound channel prevents saturation of the sound channel.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart for describing audio channel selection processing by the image control board according to the present embodiment.
Note that this audio channel selection processing may be performed on the audio control circuit 300 side (by the audio control unit 301).

In step S1501, the host CPU 151 determines whether a sound having the same sound number as that of the effect sound designated in the variation effect pattern is output.
For example, there is a case where the effect button pressing sound (sound number 31) as described above is continuously generated.
If voices of the same tone number are output (Yes in step S1501), the host CPU 151 determines in step S1502 that voice channel (in monaural) or channel pair (in stereo) the voice of the designated tone number. Select as output destination.
The host CPU 151 generates the same voice (voice based on the first voice information) or similar voice (voice based on the second voice information) as the currently output voice (voice based on the first voice information). In the case of outputting, the audio channel based on the first audio information is used to output (the information of the new first audio and the second audio information as the current first audio information) Set to the audio channel outputting the audio based on the

If voices of the same sound number are not output (No in step S1501), the host CPU 151 determines in step S1503 whether the voice of the specified sound number is stereo voice or monaural voice.
If it is stereo audio (Yes in step S1503), the host CPU 151 determines in step S1504 whether or not there is a vacant audio channel pair.
If it is determined that there is a vacant audio channel pair (Yes in step S1504), the host CPU 151 selects stereo channel audio of the specified sound number from any audio channel pair selected from the vacant audio channel pair in step S1505. Set as the output destination of.
The host CPU 151 causes the voice to be output using the voice channel not outputting voice among the plurality of voice channels (setting a new voice to the voice channel not outputting voice among the plurality of voice channels To do).

  If it is determined in step S1504 that there is no empty audio channel pair (audio is set for all audio channel pairs among the settable audio (variable) channel pairs) (No in step S1504), the host CPU 151 selects In step S1506, a voice channel pair, for example, a voice channel pair outputting a voice having a lower priority than the newest effect sound having a short remaining playback time, is selected (set) as an output destination, and the newest effect is produced. Output the sound (always).

At this time, the rendering sound of a specific audio channel pair (a audio channel pair outputting a voice having a lower priority than the newest rendering sound with a short remaining playback time) is stopped, and the stopped sound is output. A new voice is output (set as an output destination) using a voice channel pair (used for output control).
Instead of a specific audio channel pair, any audio channel pair may be used (set as an output destination) to output a new audio.
At this time, the production sound of any of the audio channel pairs is stopped, and the stopped audio is output (used as the output control) using the audio channel pair (set as an output destination). Output

Specifically, (1) stopping the sound during reproduction output of the rendering sound with low priority.
For example, when the priority is “high”, “medium”, “low” as in the voice management table of FIG. 52, the sound effect with the priority “high” with all the variable channels filled in (for example, In the group notice sounds 61 to 69 of the notice effect and the effect button continuous hitting sounds 32, 33), the voice of the BGM 14 or the like is stopped during the reach with low priority (low). (2) In the case where there are a plurality of effect sounds lower in priority than the effect sound to be newly reproduced (want to be reproduced preferentially) instead of simply stopping the output of the effect sound with low priority, Out of these effect sounds over the priority order, the output of the effect sound with the shortest remaining reproduction time or the effect sound being reproduced from the earliest is stopped.

The priority order may be provided between stereo sound and monaural sound, instead of simply following the high and low levels of priority set in the sound management table of FIG.
For example, priority is given to stereo sound over monaural sound.
In this case, if there is no free channel pair for outputting a new stereo sound, the host CPU 151 determines in step S1506 whether there is a channel pair occupied by monaural sound.
Then, among the channel pairs playing back those monaural audios, the channel pairs playing back the audio with the short remaining playback time or the audio with low priority (the stereo audio with lower priority than those monaural audios) Input a new stereo sound).

  Conversely, if monaural sound is to be prioritized over stereo sound, then select a channel pair that is playing back low-priority sound with a short remaining playback time from among the channel pairs that are playing back and outputting stereo sound. , Input new stereo sound.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the audio designated in step S1503 is not stereo audio (No in step S1503), the host CPU 151 determines in step S1507 whether or not there is an audio channel pair currently playing monaural audio. Do.
If there is such an audio channel pair (Yes in step S1507), in step S1508, the host CPU 151 inputs the monaural audio and the volume value of the designated sound number to the vacant channel of the audio channel pair.
The host CPU 151 causes the audio to be output using the audio channel not outputting the audio (set as the output destination).

If it is determined in step S1507 that there is no audio channel pair currently playing monaural audio (No in step S1507), the host CPU 151 determines whether there is an idle audio channel pair in step S1509.
If it is determined that there is a vacant audio channel pair (Yes in step S1509), the host CPU 151 selects monaural voice of the designated sound number specified in one vacant audio channel of the vacant channel pair in step S1510. Enter the volume value.
The host CPU 151 causes the audio to be output using the audio channel not outputting the audio (set as the output destination).

  When it is determined that there is no empty audio channel pair ((audio is output on all audio channels among the settable audio (variable) channels) (No in step S1509), the host CPU 151 checks in step S1511. One of the audio channels, for example, an audio channel outputting a low priority audio with a short remaining reproduction time, is selected (set) as a monaural audio output destination of the designated sound number.

At this time, the rendering sound of a specific audio channel (a pair of audio channels outputting a voice having a lower priority than the newest rendering sound with a short remaining playback time) is stopped, and the stopped sound is output ( A new voice is output (set as an output destination) using the voice channel (used for output control).
Instead of a specific audio channel, any audio channel may be used (set as an output destination) to output a new audio.
At this time, the production sound of one of the audio channels is stopped, and a new audio is output (set as an output destination) using the audio channel (used for output control) which has output the stopped audio. Do.
As described above, regarding the priority order, stereo sound and monaural sound may be prioritized instead of simply following the high and low priorities set in the voice management table of FIG.
For example, it is assumed that stereo sound is prioritized over monaural sound.
If there is no free channel pair for outputting a new monaural sound, in step S1511, the remaining reproduction time or the lower priority sound of the channel playing the monaural sound is reproduced to the channel being reproduced (the monaural sound Input a new monaural sound (even if there is a lower priority stereo sound).

Conversely, if monaural sound is to be prioritized over stereo sound, then select a channel pair that is playing back low-priority sound with a short remaining playback time from among the channel pairs that are playing back and outputting stereo sound. , Output a new monaural sound to one channel of the channel pair.
In this case, one channel of the channel pair is an empty channel.

<Soft volume adjustment processing>
The adjustment of the above-described soft volume value can be performed using the cross key when waiting for a customer.
In addition, adjustment of the soft volume value using the cross key 40 can be performed not only at the time of waiting for a customer but also during fluctuation of a special symbol. However, it can not be performed after the symbol is determined (after the symbol determination command is received).
Below, adjustment processing of the soft volume value in an image control board is explained.
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the volume is adjusted using the cross key 40 (right and left key) when waiting for a customer, the scale goes up when the volume increase button (right key) is pressed, and the volume decrease button (left key) When pressing the), it is configured to emit a voice that lowers the scale.

The sounds constituting the scale correspond to volume values “1” to “10” as shown in the voice management table (FIG. 52).
That is, a sound of "do" at volume value "1", a sound of "le" at volume value "2", a sound of "mi" at volume value "3", a sound of "fa" at volume value "4", Sound of "Soo" at volume value "5", Sound of "La" at volume value "6", Sound of "Si" at volume value "7", "Do" one octave higher at volume value "8" The volume value “9” corresponds to the sound of “Le” one octave higher, and the volume value “10” corresponds to the sound of “mi” one octave higher.

58 and 59 are diagrams for explaining the confirmation sound emitted from the voice output device (speaker) when the cross key is operated while waiting for a guest in the gaming machine of the present embodiment.
For example, when the master volume value (hard volume) is 7, it is assumed that a wait for customers shown in FIG. 58A is made, and volume adjustment (change of software volume) using the cross key 40 becomes possible.
In FIGS. 58A and 59O, for the sake of convenience, “waiting for customer” is displayed in the screen, but may not necessarily be displayed.
Further, when waiting for a customer, as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, the effect pattern 35 (stop pattern) of the stop mode is displayed, and this is displayed superimposed on the volume gauge 37 displayed at the time of volume adjustment. .

  Here, when the right key (volume up button) is pressed as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the master volume value becomes “8”, and the voice control circuit 300 generates “do” voice corresponding to the volume “8”. Is sounded from the audio output device 34 at the volume "8". At the same time, the volume gauge 37 shown in the image display device 31 is in the state of "8".

Next, as shown in FIG. 58C, when the right key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes “9”, and the host CPU 151 changes the volume of the sound of “re” corresponding to volume “9” to volume “9”. The voice control circuit 300 causes the voice control circuit 300 to output (sound). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 is incremented by one to indicate "9".
Next, as shown in FIG. 58D, when the right key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes “10”, and the host CPU 151 sets the volume of the sound of “mi ↑” corresponding to the volume “10” to “10”. Output by the voice control circuit 300 (sound generation). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 is incremented by one to indicate "10".

Next, as shown in (e) of FIG. 58, when the left key is pressed, the master volume value becomes “9”, and the host CPU 151 changes the volume of the sound of “レ” corresponding to volume “9” to volume “9”. The voice control circuit 300 causes the voice control circuit 300 to output (sound). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 decreases by one to indicate "9".
Even when the right key is pressed, no change occurs because the volume has reached the upper limit.

As shown in FIG. 58 (f), when the left key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes “8”, and the host CPU 151 sets the sound of “do ↑” corresponding to the volume “8” to the volume “9”. The control circuit 300 outputs (sounds). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 is also incremented by one to indicate "9".
Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (g), when the left key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes “7”, and the host CPU 151 sets “7” for the voice of “2” corresponding to the volume “7”. The voice control circuit 300 causes the voice control circuit 300 to output (sound). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 is also incremented by one to indicate "7".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (h), when the left key is pressed, the master volume value becomes “6”, and the host CPU 151 sets the sound of “la” corresponding to the volume “6” at the volume “9”. The voice control circuit 300 outputs (sounds). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 decreases by one to indicate "9".

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (i), when the left key is pressed, the master volume value becomes “5”, and the audio control circuit 300 sets “5” for the audio of “Soo” corresponding to the volume “5”. Output by the voice control circuit 300 (sound generation). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 decreases by one to indicate "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (j), when the left key is pressed, the master volume value becomes “4”, and the host CPU 151 sets the sound of “Fa” corresponding to the volume “4” at the volume “4”. The voice control circuit 300 outputs (sounds). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 decreases by one to indicate "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (k), when the left key is pressed, the master volume value becomes “3”, and the host CPU 151 sets the sound of “mi” corresponding to the volume “3” to volume “3”. The voice control circuit 300 outputs (sounds). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 decreases by one to indicate "3".
Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (l), when the left key is pressed, the master volume value becomes “2”, and the host CPU 151 changes the sound of “re” corresponding to the volume “2” to the volume “2”. The voice control circuit 300 outputs (sounds). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 decreases by one to indicate "2".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (m), when the left key is pressed, the master volume value becomes “2”, and the host CPU 151 sets the sound of “do” corresponding to the volume “1” to volume “1”. The voice control circuit 300 outputs (sounds). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 decreases by one to indicate "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (n), when the right key is pressed, the master volume value becomes “2”, and the host CPU 151 changes the sound of “Le” corresponding to the volume “2” to the volume “2”. The voice control circuit 300 outputs (sounds). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 decreases by one to indicate "2".
In this state, when the effect button 8 is operated, as shown in FIG. 59 (o), the volume gauge 37 is not displayed.
That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the master volume value is changed (confirmed) by the operation of the cross key 40 (right / left key), and the display of the volume gauge 37 is erased by the operation of the effect button 8.
At the time of soft volume operation with the cross key, it is also possible to just raise the volume of the confirmation sound without raising the scale. In that case, of course, only one confirmation sound may be prepared.
In addition, the volume gauge 37 becomes non-displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed without operating the effect button 8.

  If, for example, no operation of the gaming machine for 120 seconds is performed after receiving the customer waiting command, the master volume value is reset to the initial volume value (hard volume) set by the dip switch (volume switch SW 280).

  In the example of FIG. 58, the volume adjustment using the cross key 40 at the time of waiting for a customer is described, but as described above, the adjustment of the volume (soft volume) using the cross key 40 is during symbol variation It is also possible (except when the symbol is fixed) (Fig. 60).

FIG. 60 is a view for explaining the confirmation sound emitted from the sound output device (speaker) when the cross key is operated at the time of change in the gaming machine of the present embodiment.
When the cross key 40 is operated during variation of the effect pattern 35, the volume gauge 37 is displayed superimposed on the effect pattern 35.
However, as described below, at the time of finalized display of the effect pattern 35, the volume gauge 37 is not displayed even while the cross key 40 is being operated.
However, before the finalized display, if the effect pattern 35 is still in the temporary stop state, the volume gauge 37 is displayed, and the volume adjustment is also possible.

The effect symbol 35 in which the variation is stopped and displayed is displayed is important information for notifying the player of the game result (whether a hit or a loss, or a probability change symbol in the case of a hit is a normal symbol).
Therefore, when the effect pattern 35 is finalized and displayed, the volume gauge 37 displayed overlapping the effect pattern 35 is hidden so that the player can reliably view the effect pattern 35.

For example, in FIG. 60 (a), it is assumed that the effect pattern 35 is in the stop mode, and the master volume value (hard volume) at that time is eight.
At this point, volume adjustment (change of software volume) using the cross key 40 is impossible.
When a predetermined period (15 frames) elapses after the variable display of the effect pattern 35 is started in FIG. 60 (b), the volume adjustment using the cross key 40 becomes possible.
When the right key (volume up button) is pressed as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the master volume value is increased by one to "9", and a volume gauge 37 indicating "9" is displayed.
At the same time, the host CPU 151 causes the audio control circuit 300 to output (sound) the sound of "re" corresponding to the sound volume "9" at the sound volume "9".
Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the effect pattern 35 is still fluctuating, and when the right key is further depressed, the master volume value becomes "10".
The host CPU 151 causes the voice control circuit 300 to output (sound) the sound of “mi” corresponding to the volume “10” at the volume “10”. At the same time, the volume gauge 37 is incremented by one to indicate "10".

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (e), since the middle symbol is still fluctuating even after the left and right symbols of the production symbol 35 are stop-displayed (provisionally stopped) in reach mode, the cross key 40 is used Volume control is still possible.
Therefore, for example, when the left key is pressed, the master volume value becomes “9”, and the host CPU 151 outputs (sounds out) the sound of “レ” corresponding to the volume “9” at the volume “9”. Let At the same time, the volume gauge 37 decreases by one to indicate "9".
Even when the right key is pressed, no change occurs because the volume has reached the upper limit.

As shown in FIG. 60 (f), when the left key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes "8", and the host CPU 151 makes the sound of "do ↑" corresponding to the sound volume "8" sound at the sound volume "9". The control circuit 300 outputs (sounds). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 is also incremented by one to indicate "9".
Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), when the left key is further pressed, the master volume value becomes “7”, and the host CPU 151 makes “7” the sound of “2” corresponding to the volume “7”. The voice control circuit 300 causes the voice control circuit 300 to output (sound). At the same time, the volume gauge 37 is also incremented by one to indicate "7".

As shown in FIG. 60 (h), even if the middle symbol 35b is temporarily stopped and the rendering symbol 35 is temporarily stopped, the volume adjustment using the cross key 40 is still possible.
Therefore, for example, when the left key is pressed, the master volume value becomes “6”, and the host CPU 151 causes the voice control circuit 300 to output (sound) the sound of “la” corresponding to the volume “6” at the volume “6”. . At the same time, the volume gauge 37 is also incremented by one to indicate "6".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 60 (i) (when the design symbol command is received), the volume gauge 37 is not displayed when the effect pattern 35 is determined and stopped, and the cross key 40 is entered until the next wait for customers or change start. Volume adjustment using the key is impossible.
However, when the effect button 8 is operated (pressed) before the variation stop of the effect pattern, the display of the volume gauge is erased.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart for describing soft volume adjustment processing (using the left and right keys) by the image control board described with reference to FIGS. 58, 59, and 60.
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the player can adjust the volume of the gaming machine only when the gaming machine is in the customer waiting state, the host CPU 151 waits for the current state of the gaming machine to be customer waiting in step S1600. It is determined whether or not it is in the state.

The host CPU 151 can determine that the gaming machine is in the customer waiting state because the rendering symbol is not variably displayed and the image for the jackpot effect is not displayed.
If it is determined that the gaming machine is not in the customer waiting state (during symbol variation or jackpot) (No in step S1600), the host CPU 151 determines in step S1601 whether the symbol is currently in variation.
If it is determined that the symbol is not changing (No in step S1601), the host CPU 151 ends the soft volume adjustment process without performing anything.

If it is determined that the state of the gaming machine is waiting for customers (Yes in step S1600), or if it is determined that the symbol is changing (Yes in step S1601), the host CPU 151 selects the right key or the right key in step S1602. It is determined whether the left key has been operated.
This is determined by determining whether or not input signals of the right key and the left key are transmitted from the effect control board 120.
If the left and right key detection switches of the cross key 40 are connected to the image control board 150, the image control board 150 can uniquely detect the operation of the left and right keys.

If it is determined that neither the right key nor the left key is operated (No in step S1602), the host CPU 151 ends the soft volume adjustment processing without performing anything.
If it is determined that the left and right keys have been operated (Yes in step S1602), the host CPU 151 determines in step S1603 whether or not the current setting of the volume switch SW 280 is "eco".
If it is "eco" (Yes in step S1603), the software volume adjustment processing is ended without doing anything, since the adjustment itself of the master volume value is not permitted.
If it is not "eco" (No in step S1603), the host CPU 151 determines which of the right key and the left key is operated (which key input signal has been transmitted from the effect control board 120).
If it is determined that the right key has been operated (Yes in step S1604), the host CPU 151 determines whether the current master volume value is the upper limit "10" in step S1605.

If it is determined that the current volume value is not the maximum value (No in step S1605), the host CPU 151 raises the master volume value by one in step S1606, and corresponds to the master volume value after the increase in step S1607. An output command for producing a confirmation sound at the volume is transmitted to the voice control circuit 300, and the master volume adjustment processing is ended.
In this case, the VDP 200 may be controlled to display on the image display device 31 a volume bar adjusted to the adjusted master volume value.
If the current volume value is the maximum value (Yes in step S1605), it is determined that further volume increase is impossible, and the soft volume adjustment processing is ended.

When it is determined in step S1604 that the right key is not operated (No in step S1604), it is determined that the left key is operated.
In this case, in step S1608, the host CPU 151 determines whether the current volume value is the lower limit value, that is, the minimum volume value "1".

If the current volume value is the lower limit value (minimum volume value “1”) of the hard volume (Yes in step S1608), it is determined that further volume reduction is impossible, and the soft volume adjustment processing is ended.
On the other hand, when the current volume value is not the lower limit value of the adjustable volume value (No in step S1608), the host CPU 151 reduces the master volume value by 1 point in step S1609. A confirmation sound corresponding to the volume value is sent to the voice control circuit 300 to generate an output command for producing the volume at that volume, and the soft volume adjustment processing is ended.

[Voice control circuit]
<Audio output processing by audio control circuit>
Next, audio output processing by the audio control circuit 300 based on control by the host CPU 151 will be described.

As described above, the audio control circuit 300 includes a fixed channel used for outputting an error sound (system sound) and a variable channel used for outputting a rendering sound.
That is, the audio based on the specific audio information (system sound / effect sound) among the audio information is output using the specific audio channel (fixed channel / variable channel) among the plurality of audio channels.
If the command input from the host CPU 151 is a "effect sound output command", the sound control unit 301 inputs the effect sound data specified by the "effect sound output command" to the specified variable channel.
Then, the audio control unit 301 gives a control command for decoding unit and a volume control command to the decoding unit 310 and the channel volume control unit 311 in the designated audio channel.
If the input command is an "error sound output command", control is made to input error sound data according to the error content to the audio channel designated there.

The decoding unit 310 that receives the control command for the decoding unit performs processing according to the command, for example, reproduction start processing, reproduction pause processing, and reproduction end processing.
In the case of the reproduction start process, audio data corresponding to the sound number included in the control command for decoding unit is read out from the sound source ROM 400 and expansion processing is performed.
The expanded audio data is sent to the channel volume control unit 311. When the audio data stored in the sound source ROM 400 is not compressed, the expansion processing is not performed.

The channel volume control unit 311 that has received the volume control command performs processing according to the command.
For example, in the case of reproduction start, control is performed to output at a designated volume (%), and furthermore, when a fade-in timer is specified, the designated volume is reached at that time. Control.
When the reproduction is stopped, the volume is set to 0, and when the fade-out timer is defined, the volume is controlled to reach 0 at that time.

  For example, when the effect sound output command input from the host CPU 151 to the audio control unit 301 is "BGM (stereo) of the sound number 11 has a content of 90% of final volume and 0.1 second of fade timer". Will be explained.

  The audio control unit 301 refers to the effect sound output command (refers to the current status indicated by all audio channel status information), and the currently unused (standby) audio channel specified by the effect sound output command. In the decoding units 310-6 and 310-7 and the channel volume control units 311-6 and 311-7 of the audio channels ch6 and ch7 so as to start the reproduction of the designated audio (sound number 11) on the ch6 and ch7. Give a command.

The decoders 310-6 and 310-7 having received the control command for the decoder read out the audio data of the sound number 11 from the sound source ROM 400 and decompressed, while the channel volume control units 311-6 and 311-7 in the latter stage. Send to
Further, the audio control unit 301 sends, to the channel volume control unit 310, a volume control command including a volume instruction such that the volume is finally 90% in 0.1 second of the fade-in timer.
The channel volume control unit 311 that has received the volume control command determines that the audio data input from the decoding units 311-6 and 311-7 is a mixer as an audio signal that becomes 90% of the volume in 0.1 seconds. Output to 320.

When receiving the "effect sound stop command" from the host CPU 151, the voice control unit 301 refers to the status information of all the voice channels, and identifies the voice channel outputting the voice of the sound number.
Then, to stop the audio being reproduced on the audio channel, a control command for decoding unit including a reproduction stop instruction is sent to the decoding unit 310.
The decoding unit 310 of the audio channel that has received such a control command for decoding unit cancels the decompression processing of the compressed data and stops the supply of the audio data to the channel volume control unit 311.
The sound channel for which the sound number to be stopped is being output may be specified in the "effect sound stop command" output by the host CPU 151.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart for describing in detail an audio output process by the audio control circuit according to the present embodiment.
As described above, the audio output processing in the audio control circuit 300 is controlled by the audio control unit 301 provided in the audio control circuit 300.
Although the audio output process by the audio control circuit will be described in the form of a flowchart, it is actually realized by hardware logic.

In step S2001, the voice control unit 301 determines whether an error sound output command has been received from the host CPU 151 or not.
In the error sound output command, the sound number of the error sound to be output, the audio channel to be output, and the volume value (maximum) are specified.
If it is determined that an error sound output command has been received (Yes at step S2001), the voice control unit 301 reads system sound data of the sound number specified by the error sound output command from the sound source ROM 400 at step S2002. , The read system sound data and volume value (maximum) are input to the audio channel designated by the error sound output command.
Specifically, the system sound data is input to the audio channel decoding unit 310, and the volume value is input to the channel volume control unit 311.
Note that, for error sounds with low priority, such as a warning message, the volume value corresponding to the current master volume value may be input to the audio channel instead of the maximum volume value.

When it is determined that the error sound output command has not been received (No in step S2001), the voice control unit 301 determines in step S2004 whether or not the effect sound output command has been received.
The effect sound output command includes the sound number of the effect sound to be output, the volume, the audio channel, and the presence or absence of fade (fade in, fade out).

  When it is determined that the effect sound output command has been received (Yes in step S2004), the voice control unit 301 reads out the effect sound data of the designated sound number from the sound source ROM 400 in step S2005.

Next, in step S2006, the voice control unit 301 inputs the read effect sound data and the volume value to the sound channel designated by the effect sound output command.
Specifically, the effect sound data specified by the effect sound output command is input to the audio channel decoder 310, and the volume value specified by the effect sound output command is input to the channel volume control unit 311.
As described above, the volume value designated by the effect sound output command is a value based on the master volume value confirmed in step S1304 of FIG.

If it is determined in step S2004 that a rendering sound output command has not been received (No in step S2004), the voice control unit 301 determines in step S2007 whether a stop command for an error sound has been received.
The error sound stop command includes the sound number of the error sound to be stopped and the voice channel.
If it is determined that the error sound stop command has been received (Yes in step S2007), the voice control unit 301 stops the error sound being output on the designated channel in step S2008.

When it is determined in step S2007 that the error sound stop command has not been received (No in step S2007), the voice control unit 301 determines whether the effect sound stop command has been received in step S2009.
The effect sound stop command includes the sound number to be stopped.
When it is determined that the effect sound stop command has been received (Yes in step S2009), in step S2010, the audio channel that reproduces the sound of the designated sound number is controlled, and the output of the effect sound is stopped.

If the voice control unit 301 determines that the effect sound stop command has not been received in step S2009, has the volume value reset command (output in step S1403 and step S1405 in FIG. 55) been received in step S2011? It is determined whether or not. As described in FIG. 55, that the volume value reset command has been received means that there is a change in the master volume value or that there is a need for subsequent volume adjustment, FI, or FO for the effect sound currently being output. It is.
If it is determined that the volume value reset command has been received (Yes in step S2011), the voice control unit 301 is specified in the volume value reset command to the voice channel specified in the volume value reset command in step S2012. Enter a new volume value to change the volume.

If it is determined that the volume value reset command has not been received (No in step S2011), the voice control unit 301 determines in step S2013 whether or not the effect sound pause command has been received.
The effect sound pause command includes the sound number of the effect sound for which the reproduction should be paused.
If it is determined that the effect sound pause command has been received (Yes in step S2013), the sound control unit 301 controls the sound channel reproducing the designated sound number in step S2014 to output the effect sound. Pause it.
In the "production sound pause command", a sound channel outputting a production sound to be paused may be specified.

Based on the voice control by the voice control circuit described above, the following describes the voice processing during presentation in the gaming machine of the present embodiment.
As a basic flow, when the game ball is won in the starting opening, while the voice control circuit 300 causes the voice control circuit 300 to output the winning sound 1 (sound number 91), the fluctuation effect design fluctuation start sound (sound number 51), the fluctuation effect Output BGM (during non reach) according to the pattern.

In the case of a loss, BGM (during non-reach) is ended along with the stop of the fluctuation time by outputting the effect pattern fluctuation stop sound (sound number 52) according to the three effect patterns 35.
In the case of a big hit, or in the case of reach loss, the stop sound (sound number 52) of the left and right ones of the three production symbols 35 is output, and the reach BGM (sound number 12) is reached at the start of the reach production. , 14) to output.

At the time of the jackpot effect, while outputting the BGM (sound numbers 21 to 23) for the jackpot, the winning sound (91 to 97) is output for each winning on the big winning opening.
<Sound playback during the hit branch production>
An output aspect of the effect sound performed during the on-coming branch effect according to the present embodiment will be described.
This output mode is performed in the on-coming branch effect corresponding to the player's operation of the effect button during the reach effect.
In the final branch effect, when the player operates the effect button, an effect that suggests a jackpot or a loss is performed according to the jackpot determination result.

First, a brief explanation of the falling branch effect is given.
FIG. 63 is a diagram (part 1) for explaining the falling branch effect performed in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.
Here, for example, the case where the change is won in the jackpot with reach B (reach B1 or B2) shown in the change effect pattern determination table of FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 will be described as an example.
In the reach A (reach A1, A2), it is assumed that the main branch effect is not performed.
In the image display device 31, the effect pattern 35 which has been in the stop mode (a) is changed and displayed (b) with the start of the change of the special symbol.
After a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 35 stops in a state in which the left and right symbols are aligned, and the middle symbol is in a reach state (c) in which the variation continues.
After that, a reach effect (d) is performed, and a falling branch effect using the effect button 8 is performed.

In the final branch effect, an effect button image instructing the player to operate the effect button 8 and the time indicator 38 are displayed, and the time indicator 38 decreases with the passage of time ((e) → (f)).
If the player operates the effect button 8 before the time runs out, a cut-in image or the like indicating the jackpot determination result is displayed (g), and finally the game pattern 35 is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode or the loser mode. (H).

The cut-in image is likely to display a flashy object with high expectation when the jackpot judgment result is "big hit", and conversely, when the jackpot judgment result is "loss", the one with low expectation is displayed It is easy to be done.
In this explanation, since the case of winning the jackpot is described, a cut-in image with a high degree of expectation is easily displayed.
FIG. 64 is a diagram (part 2) for explaining the falling branch effect performed in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.
To explain only the difference from FIG. 63, in FIG. 64 (e), when the on-coming branch effect starts, the time indicator 38 is reduced and the level gauge 39 is extended each time the player continuously hits the button 8.
Then, when the level gauge 39 becomes MAX in FIG. 64 (f), a cut-in image or the like indicating the jackpot determination result is displayed (g), and finally, the effect pattern 35 is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode or the lost mode. (H).

In reach effects accompanied by a falling branch effect as shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a specific effect sound (for example, BGM) is prevented from being flown during the falling branch effect (e, f). There is.
Although the button effect (the hit branch effect) indicates the outcome of the fluctuation result, which is a matter of great interest to the player, with a cut-in image or the like following the button operation, by making the BGM during that time silent, the game Can give people a sense of tension and enhance the interest of the game.

FIG. 65 is a timing diagram (part 1) showing an audio output mode in the falling branch effect of the present embodiment.
The numbers in parentheses indicate the sound numbers of the effect sound.
At the start of fluctuation at timing t1, the host CPU 151 controls the voice control circuit 300 to start the output of the BGM (13) during non-reach, and, using the voice channel different from BGM (13), Fluctuating sound and stop sound (52) etc. are overlapped and reproduced and output.
At timing t2 when the reach effect starts, the host CPU 151 controls the sound control circuit 300 (rendering sound stop command) to stop the non-reach BGM (13), and the same sound channel or another sound channel is output. Use to play BGM (14) during reach.
After the predetermined period has elapsed, at timing t3 at which button effect (fall branch effect) is performed, the host CPU 151 controls the audio control circuit 300 (effect sound pause command) to temporarily stop the reach BGM (14).

In addition, since it is difficult to reproduce from the middle of voice data, the voice channel that has been outputting BGM (14) during reach to resume BGM after reaching is BGM (14) reaching during a falling branch effect Will remain occupied by
Thereafter, when the effect button 8 is operated by the player at timing t4 within the operation effective period of the effect button 8 (from timing t3 to timing t5), the host CPU 151 controls the other audio channel (effect sound output The voice control circuit 300 is controlled so as to reproduce and output a command pressing sound (31) and a button pressing sound (31) and to resume the stopped BGM output on the same voice channel (rendering sound output command).
The operation of the effect button 8 is the return condition of the paused BGM.
It may be considered that the BGM is stopped during reach until the return condition is satisfied by the operation of the effect button 8.
When a specific voice (reaching BGM) is output along with the progress of the game, the output of the reaching BGM is stopped until a predetermined return condition (button operation) is satisfied.
In addition, during the falling branch effect, during the reach BGM (14) is not paused but muted (volume value reset command), and when the button is pressed, the volume value is returned again (volume value reset command), The BGM (14) may be resumed during reaching. In this case, the player can not hear the BGM until the effect button 8 is operated, but it is possible to obtain an effect different from that in the case of pausing temporarily.

It should be noted that the same reach BGM (14) is used regardless of the big hit judgment result is a big hit or a loss, but in the case of a hit BGM for a hit in the case of a big hit after pressing of the presentation button 8, During reach for losing, BGM (not shown in the table of FIG. 52) may be reproduced and output.
When the effect button 8 is not operated within the operation effective period, the host CPU 151 controls the voice control circuit 300 so as to resume the reproduction output of the BGM (14) in reach from timing t5 (effect sound output command).

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, BGM is stopped (play sound stop command) at the end of one game (the symbol determination time has elapsed), and the next game (next change) based on the hold and the next prize. BGM is started again with the start of (play sound output command).
That is, the background sound (BGM) is stopped in the period between the changes from the determination of the symbol to the start of the next change.
In this case, the start of the next change is the return condition of the stopped BGM (due to symbol determination).

FIG. 66 is a timing chart (part 2) showing an audio output mode in the falling branch effect according to the present embodiment.
As a modified example in the case shown in FIG. 65, after the fluctuation effect is started at timing t11 and the reach effect is started at timing t12, the reach BGM is temporarily stopped during the falling branch effect started at timing t13. Not only that, as shown in FIG. 66, the delay sound (41) is output using an audio channel different from the audio channel that was playing the BGM (14) during reach (production sound output command).

Then, at the timing (t14) when the player operates the effect button 8, the button pressing sound (31) is reproduced and output, and the audio channel which has output the delay sound is controlled to obtain the delay sound (41). finish.
At the same time, control the audio channel stopping the BGM (14) during reach (production sound output command), and resume the reproduction of the BGM (14) during reach.
By doing this, the player can operate the effect button 8 with more tension.

When the effect button 8 is not operated by the timing t15 which is the end timing of the operation effective period of the effect button 8, the host CPU 151 reproduces the delay sound (41) until the timing t15 and reaches from the timing t15. The voice control circuit 300 is controlled to resume the reproduction of the middle BGM (14).
When a specific sound (BGM) is output along with the progress of the game, when the condition for stopping this is satisfied (the start of the falling branch effect), the output of the BGM is stopped, (the effect sound stop command) , BGM to output a sound subjected to a specific effect (effect sound output command).

FIG. 67 is a timing chart (No. 3) showing an audio output mode in the falling branch effect according to the present embodiment.
As a modified example in the case shown in FIG. 65, after the fluctuation effect is started at timing t21 and the reach effect is started at timing t22, the BGM during reach is temporarily stopped during the falling branch effect started at timing t23. Not only that, as shown in FIG. 67, a delayed sound is output using the audio channel that was playing BGM during reach.
That is, as reach BGM, reach BGM (16) incorporating delay sound in advance is used.
Specifically, the reach-in-progress BGM (16) in which the delay sound is incorporated in advance is BGM data whose duration is adjusted so that the sound is delayed at the timing of the button presentation start.
In addition, a delay may be applied to the BGM (14) during reach by sound processing from the timing of the start of the button effect start.

Then, at the timing (t24) at which the player operates the effect button 8, the button pressing sound (31) is reproduced and output, and the audio channel which has output the delay sound is controlled (effect sound stop command), End BGM (16) in reach with delay.
At the same time, control the audio channel stopping the BGM (14) during reach (production sound output command), and resume the reproduction of the BGM (14) during reach.

When the effect button 8 is not operated by the timing t25 which is the end timing of the operation effective period of the effect button 8, the host CPU 151 reproduces the BGM (16) in reach until the timing t25, and from the timing t25 The voice control circuit 300 is controlled to resume the reproduction of the BGM (14) during reach.
When a specific sound (BGM) is output along with the progress of the game, the sound having a specific effect is output to the BGM at a predetermined timing.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart (No. 4) showing an audio output mode in the falling branch effect according to this embodiment.
As a modified example in the case shown in FIG. 65, after the fluctuation effect is started at timing t31 and the reach effect is started at timing t32, when the effect button 8 is operated during the falling branch effect started at timing t33 From reaching the start of the reach production to the start of the oncoming branch production, reproduce the part other than the rust part and start the falling production so that a specific part (for example, the most exciting chorus part etc.) in the BGM during the reach is reproduced. From this, it is silent until the timing of the button operation.

That is, reproduction of BGM non-sabi (18) during reach is started from the start of reach effect (effect sound output command).
During reach BGM non-sabi (18) is audio data from which a specific part (for example, sabi) of music is deleted.
For example, in the case of a music consisting of intro → a melody → b melody → sabi, at least a portion of the chop is deleted.
However, in order to avoid unnatural performance, it is necessary to adjust the playback time to be appropriate, such as using only B melody, in accordance with the time from the start of reach production to the button production (fall production). There is.
Then, during reach output BGM non-sabi (18) during playback output, at timing t33 to start the falling branch effect, control the audio channel that was playing BGM non-sabi (18) during reach (rendering sound stop Command) Stop BGM (14) while reaching.
The BGM non-sabi (18) may be repeatedly reproduced and output during reach until the timing t33 at which the final branch effect is started.
In the voice control circuit of this embodiment, it is possible to issue an instruction to make a reservation so that the same voice is reproduced in succession.

Then, at the timing (t34) when the player operates the effect button 8 (when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot), the reproduction output of the BGM rust (17) during reach including only the rust portion is started (render Sound output command).
By doing this, the player can feel a very strong sense of exhilaration since the performance of the most exciting chorus in the music is started at the time of the jackpot in the branch effect.
If the jackpot determination result is a loss, BGM for the time of loss not shown in FIG. 52 may be reproduced.
Even if the reach BGM rust (17), not reach BGM non-sabi (18) are not prepared, the reach BGM (14) is reproduced and output, and it is suspended from the start of the falling branch effect to the button operation Good.
In addition, during the period from the start timing t33 of the button effect to the button operation timing t34, the reach BGM non-sabi (18) is not stopped during reach, but it is switched to the reach BGM rust (17) at the operation timing of the effect button good.
When the effect button 8 is not operated by the timing t35 which is the end timing of the operation effective period of the effect button 8, the host CPU 151 silences until the timing t35 and reaches BGM during reach including only the chorus portion from the timing t35. The voice control circuit 300 is controlled to start the reproduction of (17).
As described above, the host CPU 151 (voice control unit 301) performs the BGM (specific voice output along with the progress of the game) with the establishment of the specific condition (the operation of the effect button 8, the end of the operation valid period). I will output from a specific part of my (Sabi).

<Voice control during jackpot game>
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an output aspect of effect sound during the jackpot game in the present embodiment.
(A) shows the case where the number of rounds is large, for example, the case of 16R big hit, and (b) shows the case where the number of rounds is short, for example 5R big hit.

  If the same background sound consisting of "A merlo", "B merlo" and "Sabi" is to be reproduced and output in the long period of (a), during a long jackpot of 16 rounds, it is a portion most desired to be heard by the player It is thought that there is a possibility that "Sabi" can be played through. Depending on the song, it may be possible to watch the "Sabi" part twice repeatedly.

On the other hand, in the case of the short hit (5R big hit), as is clear from (b), the music is not reproduced to the part of "Sabi", and the player can not listen to the part that he wants to hear most.
Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as shown in (c), in the case of the 5R big hit, only the portion (specific part) of the rust of the stage sound (predetermined sound) for the big hit is repeatedly reproduced and output Make it

As a method, as shown in the voice management table of FIG. 52, BGM for A melody (sound number 21), BGM for B melody (sound number 22), BGM for rust (sound number 23) as a jackpot BGM. B)), and at the time of short hit (5R big hit), BGM for the chorus (sound number 23) is continuously input to the voice channel.
In addition, when the long hit (16R big hit), the effect sound data is input to the sound channel in the order of sound number 21 → sound number 22 → sound number 23.

The audio control circuit of this embodiment can issue an instruction to the audio control unit 301 to make a reservation so as to continuously reproduce different sound data.
In this way, even in a short hit where the playable time of the effect sound is short, it is possible to reliably reproduce and output the portion of the effect sound that the player most wants to hear (the player wants to hear). Of course, it is also possible to use one A-melo and one B-melo as one audio data, or to prepare audio data for a full chorus including all background sounds in a jackpot and audio data for rust.
That is, one song data including all of A melody, B melody, and rust may be prepared for reproduction per 16 rounds.
As described above, it is because such data can be reproduced at least once to "Sabi" if it is long.
The jackpot game includes an opening (OP), a round, an interval not shown between the rounds, and an ending (ED).
The above-mentioned jackpot BGM is reproduced and output during an interval during the above-mentioned round.
During the ending, sound effects such as "Mother!" And an alarm sound (sound effect) regarding the next game are output.
For example, when transitioning to the definite variation mode after the current big hit, a sound effect such as “positive variation mode rush!” As described below is output.

<Background sound volume control during SE playback>
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the timing of the background sound and the sound effect (SE) when the effect mode is switched.
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, at the time of effect mode change (for example, after a small hit), or when entering a probability change mode after a large hit, a sound effect for notifying the player of this is reproduced.
The sound effect referred to here is an audio for clearly indicating a mode change (such as transition to a probability change mode) such as “XXX mode entry!”.
Therefore, this sound effect is an important voice for the player when transitioning to the probability change mode after a big hit, etc., and needs to be heard by the player as much as possible.
Not only the sound effect indicating the transition to the definite change mode, but also the case where the gaming state changes, the zone rushing sound with high jackpot reliability, and the like are sounds to be notified to the player clearly.
However, since the sound effect is reproduced while being covered by the background sound being reproduced during the variation of the special symbol, the sound effect may be difficult for the player to hear if the volume of the background sound is large.
Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the background sound and the sound effect overlap, the sound effect is emphasized by lowering the volume of the BGM.

FIG. 71 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating volume control of BGM when the background sound and the sound effect overlap;
As apparent from FIG. 71, the background sound being reproduced at a constant volume from the start of variation is lowered in volume at the time of mode transition production, and mode entry SE occurs almost simultaneously, and mode entry SE ends after mode transition presentation At the same time, the volume of the background sound is returned.
As a result, the sound effect is emphasized, and the player can clearly recognize that the rendering mode has been switched.

FIG. 72 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating volume control of BGM in the case where the background sound and the sound effect overlap.
As shown in FIG. 71, when the volume of the background sound is changed suddenly (suddenly), the music has a "buzz break" by all means, which gives the player an uncomfortable feeling.
Therefore, in order to suppress such discomfort, when changing the volume of the sound effect, a feeling of shortness is avoided by fade-in or fade-out over several frames before and after the timing of the start and the end.

  To realize the volume control as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, as described in step S1404 and step S1405 in the flowchart of FIG. The volume control command to instruct adjustment may be input to the voice control circuit 300.

If the BGM changes when transitioning to a probability change mode or entering a zone with high jackpot reliability (transition), the BGM (11) that has been reproduced at a constant volume from the start of fluctuation is lowered in volume at the time of mode transition effect The mode entry SE occurs almost simultaneously, and the mode entry SE is ended after the mode transition presentation, and the output of the BGM (11 ') after the mode transition is started, for example, at the volume before the mode transition presentation.
As a result, the sound effect is emphasized, and the player can clearly recognize that the rendering mode has been switched.

  The fade-in and fade-out volume and timing of the effect sound (here, background sound) may be specified in advance in the effect sound output command, or the sound data of the effect sound may be pre-specified at a predetermined timing ( It may be prepared in advance as sound data to be faded in and faded out before and after SE.

<Advance notice effect (example of inputting similar sound to the same audio channel)
In addition, in the effect in the effect of the gaming machine, a large number of voices are often generated simultaneously in the advance effect which suggests the possibility (expected degree) of the big hit during reach effect. In that case, efficient use of the limited number of audio channels of audio control circuit 300 is strongly sought.

First, an outline of the notice effect performed by the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 121 of the effect control board 120 selects the change effect pattern based on the change pattern command transmitted from the main control board 110, but on the other hand, notices separately from the change effect pattern. The presence or absence of the execution of the presentation, and further, the type of the announcement presentation to be executed is selected.
The notice effect is an effect for notifying the player of the determination of the jackpot and the degree of expectation during reach etc., and the selection of the notice effect including the presence or absence of the execution is a random number for effect for selecting a fluctuation effect pattern. And a random number value (notice random number value) different from.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a notice effect determination table used when the CPU of the effect control board selects the notice effect in the present embodiment.
In FIG. 73, as shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the fluctuation effect pattern 1 is a fluctuation effect pattern in which the normal fluctuation is shifted to the normal reach A1 or C1 (per). The normal fluctuation is an effect accompanied by a normal fluctuation which does not accompany pseudo-sequences to be described later, a blackout effect and the like.
The normal reach is a variation mode in which the central symbol continues to fluctuate while stopping in a state in which the left and right production symbols (decorative symbols) are aligned, and as a result, the fluctuation stops in a jackpot or a lost manner.

When the fluctuation effect pattern 1 is selected from the fluctuation effect pattern selection table of FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, if the obtained notice random number value is any one of 0 to 100, the jackpot is decided during the reach effect or at the start of the reach effect Perform “finalized effect” meaning The finalized effect is an effect that can be selected only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery.
In the case of the fluctuation effect pattern 10 (loss) shown below, it is not selected.
It is often performed using a specific full-screen cut-in image, and may also be performed using the emission of a feature and the associated loud announcement sound.

In addition, if the obtained notice random number value is any of 101 to 150, “group notice” of high expectation is performed during reach production or at the start of reach production. Although it is a flashy effect that a large group of small characters run through the screen, it does not mean that a big hit is decided.
However, in the case of the fluctuation production pattern 1 (per), since the probability that this group notice is selected is much higher than in the case of the fluctuation performance pattern 10 (loss) shown below, this production is displayed At this point, it can be said that the expectation to the jackpot is high.

In addition, if the acquired notice random number value is any of 151 to 200, the "chance notice of high expectation" is performed during the reach effect. In this case, it is a relatively modest effect that merely a specific character is displayed on the screen, and does not mean jackpot confirmation.
However, in the case of the fluctuation production pattern 1 (per), the probability that this "character preview" is selected is higher than in the case of the fluctuation production pattern 10 (loss) shown below, so it is not as good as the above group notice However, it can be said that the expectation to the jackpot is high when this effect is displayed.

  If the obtained notice random number value is any one of 201 to 255, no notice effect is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the fluctuation effect pattern 10 is a fluctuation effect pattern in which the normal fluctuation is shifted to the normal reach A1 or C1 (loss).
When the variation presentation pattern 10 is selected, if the acquired notice random number value is 0 to 20, group announcement of high expectation is performed during reach presentation or at the start of reach presentation.
If the obtained notice random number value is 21 to 50, the character notice of the high expectation degree is performed during the reach effect.
If the acquired random number is any one of 51 to 255, any notice effect is not performed.
Since the variation effect pattern 10 is selected when the big hit determination result is a loss, the fixed effect (full screen cut-in or the like) can not be performed.

In FIG. 73, as shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the fluctuation effect pattern 3 is a fluctuation effect pattern in which transition is made from pseudo continuous fluctuation (pseudo series) to reach B1, D1 (per).
The reach B1 and D1 (per) are the subsequent reach from the pseudo run variation.
In addition, a pseudo ream is an effect in which the pseudo fluctuation which fluctuates again after two or three decorative symbols temporarily stop is performed twice during one fluctuation. It is possible to gradually increase the jackpot expectation that the player feels due to such artificial fluctuation.

When the change production pattern 3 is selected, if the obtained notice random number is any one of 0 to 100, during the reach production or at the transition from the pseudo ream to the reach production, the whole screen cut-in etc meaning the big hit decision Perform the finalization of.
In addition, if the obtained notice random number value is any of 101 to 200, group notice of high expectation is performed during reach production or at the start of reach production. Although it is a flashy effect that a large group of small characters run through the screen, it does not mean that a big hit is decided.
However, in the case of the fluctuation production pattern 1 (per), since the probability that this group notice is selected is much higher than in the case of the fluctuation performance pattern 10 (loss) shown below, this production is displayed At this point, it can be said that the expectation to the jackpot is high.
If the obtained notice random number value is any of 201 to 255, no notice effect is performed.

In FIG. 73, as shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the fluctuation effect pattern 12 is a fluctuation effect pattern in which transition is made from pseudo continuous fluctuation (pseudo series) to reach B1, D1 (loss).
The reach B1 and D1 (loss) is a reach subsequent to the pseudo-train fluctuation.
When the fluctuation effect pattern 6 is selected from the fluctuation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, if the obtained notice random number value is any one of 0 to 100, the character notice of high expectation is achieved during the reach effect. It does, but eventually it is a loss.

In FIG. 73, reach A1, C1 (performing a lost) effect performing a normal reach fluctuation, and a reach B1 performing a pseudo-link as a fluctuation effect pattern which may perform an advance notice effect among FIG. 36 and FIG. D1 (hit, lost) is illustrated.
This is merely an example, and in the case of the reach A2 or C2 in which normal reach fluctuation is performed, or in the case of the reach B2 or D2 in which a pseudo link is performed, the notice effect may be performed.
However, a symbol turning effect (variation effect pattern 5) without chance effect, a chance effect (variation effect patterns 6, 7 and 8), a normal fluctuation effect (variation effect pattern 9), a shortening fluctuation effect (variation effect patterns 14 and 15) In the case of), since it is difficult to generate a notice effect such as a confirmed notice effect, a group notice, or a character notice, it is excluded from the table of FIG.

FIGS. 74 and 75 show examples of effects selected and executed using the variation effect determination table shown in FIGS. 36 and 37 and the notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 48 in the gaming machine of the present invention. .
In FIG. 74, the variation production pattern 1 is selected in the variation production pattern tables of FIGS. 36 and 37 (the jackpot determination result is a big hit), and the notice production No. The transition of the effect display when the fixed effect of 1 is selected is shown.

At the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation display (b) of the effect pattern 35 which has been in the stop mode (a) is started in the image display device 31.
Thereafter, for example, at the time of reach transition (c), a full screen cut-in (for example, a rainbow pattern) indicating the jackpot determination is displayed.
After that, after the effect pattern 35 becomes the reach mode (d) and the reach effect (e) is performed, the effect pattern 35 stops in the big hit mode (f) and becomes the big win.

  As for FIG. 75, the fluctuation production pattern 1 (big hit judgment result is a big hit) or the fluctuation production pattern 10 (big hit judgment result is a loss) is selected in the fluctuation production pattern table of FIG. 36 and FIG. . It shows the transition of the effect display when the group advance notice effect of 2 is selected.

At the start of variation of the special symbol, in the image display device 31, the effect pattern 35 which has been in the stop mode (a) starts the variation display (b).
Thereafter, for example, when the effect pattern 35 becomes the reach mode (c), a group notice (d) having a high jackpot expectation is generated.
As described above, since the group notice can be selected in both the case of the big hit and the case of the loss, although the probability (the degree of expectation) is high at this time, the big hit has not been determined.
Thereafter, after the reach effect (e) is performed, the effect pattern 35 is stopped in the big hit mode (f) or the lost mode (g), and the big hit or the loss is determined.

  By the contents (types) of the jackpot decision or high anticipation notice presentation performed during such a fluctuation production, the player can predict whether or not the currently performed fluctuation production will be a big hit, It has become one of the fun of gaming.

In particular, in the notice effect called group notice, many voices of characters constituting the group are generated.
The voices of the characters are different from each other, and are managed as sound numbers 52 to 69 as voices for the preview effect in the voice management table (FIG. 52).
When the group announcement characters running through the screen give out voices with a time difference, when the respective announcement effect sound is input to the audio channel, the audio channel provided in the audio control circuit 300 is exhausted immediately.

Unlike the case where the effect button 8 described above is continuously hit, the sounds emitted by the group preview characters are different from one another, but in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the effect sounds of sound numbers 61 to 69 are related (similar to each other Treat as a group of voices (groups) and input them virtually as the same sound continuously to the same voice channel.
The host CPU 151 generates the same voice (voice based on the first voice information) or similar voice (voice based on the second voice information) as the currently output voice (voice based on the first voice information). In the case of outputting, the audio channel based on the first audio information is used to output (the information of the new first audio and the second audio information as the current first audio information) Set to the audio channel outputting the audio based on the

Only one voice can be input at the same time on one voice channel, and it will be overwritten with the voice input later, but if a large amount of voice is input continuously with a time difference, it will make the player so uncomfortable. There is nothing to do.
Rather, by giving the same sound number to sound data of different contents, it is possible to input to the same audio channel, and a limited number of audio channels can be used very efficiently.
In addition, since only one sound can be output at one time on one sound channel, sound data of different contents do not overlap with each other.

In order to treat the effect sounds of different sound numbers as one group, the sound numbers may be configured by two pieces of information of information specifying a group and information specifying a sound.
In this way, the voice control unit 301 of the voice control circuit 300 can easily determine whether the input voice belongs to a group (to be input to the same voice channel) or not. Can do.
Conversely, even with voices having the same content, it is possible to realize unique acoustic effects by inputting different sound numbers simultaneously, or by inputting time differences, etc., by assigning different sound numbers. It is.

<Prize sound in round game>
FIG. 76 is a diagram for describing a winning sound generated during a round game in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.
In addition. FIG. 76 shows a winning sound generated during an unspecified round game in the jackpot game except for the 2R jackpot (short hit).
The prescribed number of winning numbers per round is nine (see FIG. 11). That is, when 10 or more prizes are won in one round, it becomes an "over prize."

As shown in FIG. 76, when the interval period (a) from the opening period or the previous round is ended during the jackpot game, the round game is started (b).
In the round game, when one gaming ball is won in the big winning openings 16, 17, a notification sound "do" is generated to notify the player of it.
As shown in FIG. 52, different notification sounds are set in the voice management table for each winning number, and if a winning is continued during the round game, “Dee mi fa so la si do The scale is to be configured.

For example, if the number of winnings is the first, winning sound 1 (sounding "do") of sound number 91 is pronounced, and if the number of winnings is the second, winning sound 2 (sounding "re") of sound number 92 is pronounced If the number of winning prizes is third, winning tone 3 (sound generation is "mi") of sound number 93 is pronounced, and if the number of winning prizes is fourth, winning sound 4 of sound number 94 (pronunciation is "fa") is pronounced Be done.
Of course, only one winning sound may be generated, and the same winning sound may be generated for each winning.

When the second game ball wins, a notification sound 2 of "RE" is generated (d), and when a winning is generated one after another and the ninth winning is generated, one octave higher than in the case of (d). The notification sound 9 of "Le" is pronounced (e).
At this point, the number of winning prizes for the round game has been reached.

  After this, when the game ball wins the big winning opening, the notification sound 10 “mi” for notifying the tenth winning is not generated, and the player is overwinning that exceeds the prescribed number (9) In order to inform and bless the player, the over-prize notification sound (Fig. 52: sound number 110) is pronounced (it is naturally pleasing to the player because more prizes will be generated and more prize balls will be obtained than the rule). Be done (f).

After that, when a winning to the special winning opening occurs, it is an over winning as it is of course (11) which exceeds the prescribed number (11).
However, in this case, the over winning notice sound is not pronounced. The over winning notification sound is pronounced only for the first over winning winning. Although it is a pleasure for the player, it may be possible that a player who feels nervous may come out when the notification sound is repeatedly generated.
In addition, a notification sound 11 "fa" for notifying the 11th winning is not generated.

The round game ends with the reaching of the prescribed winning number, and it shifts to an interval period (h).
In the next round game or the next jackpot game, a notification of winning message is similarly issued, but the winning count is naturally reset every round.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart for explaining winning notification processing in a round game by the image control board.
The host CPU 151 determines in step S 2101 whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played.

If it is determined that the round game has not started yet (in the beginning or even during the opening, during the interval, even if it is not a big hit game or a big hit game, it is in the interval) (No in step S2101), the prize notification processing ends as it is .
If it is determined that the round game has started (Yes in step S2101), the host CPU 151 initializes the winning number count value N (substitutes 0) in step S2102.

The host CPU 151 waits for the occurrence of winning of the game ball to the big winning opening and the end of the opening time.
In step S2103, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not the game ball has won the special winning opening.

When it is determined that a winning has occurred (Yes in step S2103), the host CPU 151 adds 1 to the value of the winning number count value N (N ← N + 1) in step S2104.
When it is determined that a winning is not generated (No in step S2103), the host CPU 151 ends the present jackpot winning notification process.

  In step S2105, the host CPU 151 determines whether or not the winning number count value N is equal to or more than a prescribed number (for example, nine).

When it is determined that the winning number count value N is less than the prescribed number (9) (No in step S2105), the host CPU 151 reproduces and outputs the Nth winning sound in the voice management table in step S2108. The effect sound output command is transmitted to the voice control circuit 300. For example, when the value of the winning number count value N is 1 (when the winning number of the round game is 1), the winning sound 1 of the sound number 91 (the sound generation is “do”) is designated.
If the value of the winning number count value N is 2 (if the number of winning numbers in the relevant round is 2), then the winning sound 2 (sound generation is “RE”) of the sound number 92 is designated.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game balls are successively won in the large winning opening in one round game, the number of winnings (the value of the number-of-winnings count value N) is increased. It is configured to be a melody of "."
Of course, such an effect is, of course, only an example. That is, only one winning sound may be prepared, and the number of winnings may be counted, but the same winning sound may be generated for each winning without changing the sound according to the number.

When the host CPU 151 causes the voice control circuit 300 to output different winning notification sounds for different winning numbers, the host CPU 151 instructs the effect sound of the sound numbers 91 to 100 to be input to the same voice channel as a series of related sounds.
As a result, it is possible to prevent exhaustion of a limited audio channel, and to suppress the problem that the notification sounds overlap due to time difference notification sounds being input to different audio channels, and they may be heard to be shifted from each other.

If it is determined that the winning number count value is equal to or greater than the specified number (Yes in step S2105), it is determined whether the number-of-winning-number count value N is one greater than the specified number (for example, nine).
If the number-of-winning-pieces count value N is larger by one than the prescribed number (for example, nine) (Yes in step S2106), the host CPU 151 notifies in step S2107 an over winning notification having contents such as An effect sound output command for reproducing and outputting a sound (FIG. 52: sound number 110) is transmitted to the voice control circuit 300.
The winning sound corresponding to the winning number count value N is not reproduced and output.

  In step S2106, when the number-of-winning-pieces count value N is not larger by one than the prescribed number (for example, nine) in step S2106 (the count value N is two or more more than the prescribed number) (No in step S2106) The over winning notice sound and the winning sound corresponding to the count value N are not generated, and the big hit winning notice processing is ended.

<Notification process at the start of reach production>
By the way, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in the specific effect mode, at the start of the reach effect, for example, an effect sound (reach notification effect sound) such as “reach!” Is output, and the player is shifted to reach. Is notified.
However, when "reach notification effect sound" is reproduced and output at the timing when BGM switches from BGM before reach to BGM during reach with the start of reach production, "reach notification effect sound" is covered by "reaching BGM", and listening It becomes difficult.
Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the "reach notification effect sound" is reproduced and output in the following manner so that the reach notification effect sound does not get over the BGM during the reach.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing transition of effect display accompanied with reach notification effect in the present embodiment.
At the start of variation of the special symbol, the effect symbol 35 in the stop mode (a) of the image display device 31 starts the variation display (b). In addition, BGM during non-reach (before reach) is reproduced and output.
Thereafter, when the effect pattern 35 is in the reach mode (c), the BGM during non-reach is stopped, and a reach notification effect sound "reach!" For notifying the player that the reach is reached is reproduced and output.

In the present embodiment, after the reproduction of the reach notification effect sound is finished, the BGM during reach is reproduced and output at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the reach effect.
After that, through reach effect (e), if the jackpot determination result is "hit", the display pattern 35 is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode (f), and if the jackpot determination result is "loss", the effect pattern 35 is The stop display is displayed in the lost mode (g).
By doing this, since the reach notification effect sound does not get over the BGM during reach, the player can surely hear the reach notification effect sound.

By the way, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a plurality of effect modes even for the same variation pattern, and the characters serving as the motif of the effect are different in each effect mode, and accordingly BGM (especially BGM before reach). And background images are different.
The “effect mode” is, for example, a mode different from the background image, the BGM, the option of variation effect, and the like, and is a mode which can be appropriately shifted in order to eliminate the monotony of the game being played.

  The “reach notification effect sound” is also different for each effect mode, and is typically a voice using the voice of the character that is the motif of each effect mode.

Because the playback time of the "reach notification effect sound" differs depending on the effect mode depending on the voice of the character, etc., and the BGM during reach is constant regardless of the effect mode, the reach is immediately after the output of the "reach notification effect sound" When the BGM is played back and output, it is unnatural that the end time of the BGM during reach within the fixed fluctuation time becomes random while the “reach notification effect sound” and the BGM do not suffer during reach.
If "reach in background music" of different length is prepared for each effect mode in order to prevent that, the data capacity increases and the processing becomes complicated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, such a problem is solved by setting the start timing of the "reaching BGM" constant in all the rendering modes after the output of the "reach notification effect sound".

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is assumed that first to third effect modes are prepared.
For example, in the case of fluctuation patterns 1 and 8 (per reach A, reach A loss) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, a pre-reach BGM or reach having a motif of three different characters according to each effect mode. An effect using a notification effect sound ("reach!") Is performed.

  Of course, in this embodiment, not only the fluctuation patterns 1 and 8 but also the fluctuation patterns including fluctuation patterns 2 and 9 and fluctuation patterns 21, 22, 28 and 29 for probability variation gaming state, and other fluctuation patterns including reach effects Similar effects are possible.

In addition, according to the game state and the effect mode, for example, one of the plurality of change effect pattern determination tables is referred to as the change effect pattern determination table for determining the effect pattern. Therefore, the variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 36 and 37 are also tables based on one effect mode.
Therefore, the effects by the fluctuation effect patterns (1, 2, 10, 11) in FIGS. 36 and 37 corresponding to the fluctuation patterns 1 and 8 are also included in any of the effects by the first to third effect modes described above. However, in the following, effects in the first to third effect modes will be described as effect patterns different from the variation effect patterns in FIGS. 36 and 37.

  In the case of fluctuation pattern 1 (8), the effect contents of the first effect mode are reach A1 'effect, the effect contents of the second effect mode is reach A1' ', the effect contents of the third effect mode is reach A1' '' Think of it as an effect.

  In the first effect mode (reach A1 'effect), BGM (during non-reach)-A1 (Fig. 52: sound number 120) before the start of reach effect, reach notification effect sound 1 (Fig. 52: sound) at the start of reach effect After reproducing the number 130), a common BGM (during reach)-A (FIG. 52: sound number 123) common to each effect mode is output.

In the second effect mode (reach A1 ′ ′ effect), BGM (non-reaching) -A2 (FIG. 52: sound number 121) is used before the start of the reach effect, and the reach notification effect sound 2 (FIG. 52: at the start of the reach effect) After reproducing the sound number 131), the common BGM (during reach)-A (FIG. 52: sound number 123) common to each effect mode is output.
In the third effect mode (reach A1 ′ ′ ′ effect), BGM (during non-reach) -A3 (FIG. 52: sound number 122) is used prior to the start of reach effect, and reach information effect sound 1 (FIG. 52) at the start of reach effect. : After reproducing the sound number 132), a common BGM (during reach)-A (FIG. 52: sound number 123) common to each effect mode is output.

FIG. 79 is a timing chart showing an audio output mode in a specific effect mode in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The numbers in parentheses indicate the sound numbers of the effect sound.
At the same time as the start of change (timing t41), the host CPU 151 controls the voice control circuit 300 to start output of the (change effect pattern specified by the effect pattern specification command based on the effect mode) BGM (120, 121, 122) In addition, the fluctuation sound and stop sound (52) of the rendering pattern 35 are superimposed and reproduced and output using a sound channel different from the BGM (120, 121, 122).

  At timing t42 when the reach effect starts, the host CPU 151 controls the audio control circuit 300 (effect sound stop command) to stop the BGM (120, 121, 122), and the same audio channel or another audio channel. To reproduce and output reach notification effect sounds 1, 2, 3 (130, 131, 132).

  As described above, the non-reach BGM and reach notification effect sound are different for each effect mode, and in the case of the first effect mode, BGM-A1 (120) and reach notification effect sound 1 (130), second In the case of the effect mode, BGM-A2 (121) and reach notification effect sound 2 (131), and in the case of the third effect mode, BGM-A3 (122) and reach notification effect sound 3 (132) are used.

The time has passed, and when reaching reach BGM start timing t43 starting from the reach effect start time (this timing is common in all effect modes), the host CPU 151 controls the voice control circuit 300 (rendering sound output Command), play back and output BGM (123) during common reach.
The length of the sound source of the reach notification effect sound is made in advance so that the reproduction of the reach notification effect sound (130, 131, 132) is finished by this timing.
It can be said that the output of the BGM (second voice) is limited during the common reach while outputting the reach notification effect sound (first voice).

By doing this, the reach notification effect (130, 131, 132) does not overlap with the BGM (123) in reach in any effect mode.
In addition, since the common reach BGM (123) is not reproduced and output following the reach notification effect sounds having different lengths for each of the effect modes, the end timing of the common reach BGM (123) may differ depending on the effect mode. Nor.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, information that is important to the player is reproduced and output so that the reach notification effect sounds (130, 131, 132) do not overlap with the BGM (123) during the reach. A certain reach transition can be effectively notified to the player by voice.
In addition, since the number of sounds (BGM during reach and the reach notification effect sound) to be simultaneously reproduced and output is reduced, it is possible to efficiently use a limited number of sound channels.

Furthermore, even when the reach notification effect sound has different lengths for each effect mode, the process can be simplified by uniquely defining the start timing of the BGM during reach at a predetermined timing after the start of the reach effect. .
In addition, in the effect including the reach effect, it is possible to make the effect by the reach notification effect sound and the BGM before and after it natural and to enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, as described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the fluctuation stop sound is output when the fluctuation display of the effect pattern 35 is temporarily stopped. This is a sound effect for notifying the player that the variation of the rendering symbol (and thus the special symbol) has temporarily stopped.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a stop mode of the effect symbol in the gaming machine of the present embodiment.
Basically, the effect pattern 35 (left pattern 35a, central pattern 35b, right pattern 35c) is temporarily stopped at different timings, and the variation stop sound for each effect pattern is started to be output at different timings. .
For example, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), in the normal fluctuation (fluctuation pattern 7) without the reach effect in the normal gaming state, the effect symbol 35 is the left symbol 35a (c), the right symbol 35c (d), and the center Temporarily stop in the order of the symbol 35c (e).

However, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), at the time of normal fluctuation (fluctuation pattern 27) without reach effect in the probability variation gaming state, three effect symbols 35 (left symbol 35a, central symbol 35b, right symbol 35c) are simultaneously Temporarily stop (c).
Further, at the time of specific reach effect, the left and right symbols 35a and 35c temporarily stop simultaneously when the reach is established.

In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when outputting the fluctuation stop sound (52) in accordance with the temporary stop of the left symbol 35a, the left speaker (voice output device) 34 on the left and right sides is directed to the left of the player. Control so that the volume of the speaker is higher than the volume of the right speaker.
When outputting the fluctuation stop sound (52) in accordance with the temporary stop of the right pattern 35c, the volume of the speaker on the right side toward the player, the volume of the speaker on the left side, the volume of the speaker on the right side Control to be larger than.
When outputting the fluctuation stop sound (52) in accordance with the temporary stop of the central symbol 35b, control is performed so that the volumes of the left and right speakers become the same.
As a result, when the effect pattern 35 is temporarily stopped in the order of left → right → center, the player can enjoy three-dimensional sound about the fluctuation stop sound of the effect pattern.

  In the following, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a voice output process and an output mode will be described in the case where a plurality of fluctuation stop sounds are simultaneously generated by temporarily stopping a plurality of effect symbols 35 simultaneously under specific conditions.

FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of the output mode of the fluctuation stop sound in the case where a plurality of effect symbols temporarily stop fluctuation at the time of normal fluctuation of the probability variation gaming state. The numbers in parentheses indicate the sound numbers of the effect sound.
At the same time as the start of fluctuation, the host CPU 151 controls the audio control circuit 300 (rendering sound output command) to output a fluctuation start sound, and also uses a sound channel different from the fluctuation start sound to generate a normal BGM for fluctuation (15). Start output. Furthermore, the host CPU 151 reproduces and outputs fluctuating sounds and the like of the effect pattern 35 by using another sound channel.

At the fluctuation stop timing, the host CPU 151 controls the voice control circuit 300 (rendering sound output command) and generates different stop sounds (of different data) for the left symbol 35a, the central symbol 35b, and the right symbol 35c. Let
In this case, since three variable channels are used for the fluctuation stop sound of the three symbols of the left symbol 35a, the center symbol 35b, and the right symbol 35c, it can be said that the voice channel can be used efficiently. Absent.

This is because, in the case of another sound (another data) even if the fluctuation stop sound has the same content, the fluctuation start sound having the same content is input to different sound channels.
Even when the variation stop sound of each rendering pattern is the same data (in contrast to the present embodiment described below), in the case of control to input the variation stop sound to a different voice channel for each rendering pattern Similar problems occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variable stop sounds are generated using the audio channel more efficiently.

FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an output mode of the fluctuation stop sound when the plurality of effect symbols temporarily stop the fluctuation in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The numbers in parentheses indicate the sound numbers of the effect sound.
During normal fluctuation (fluctuation pattern 9) in the probability variation gaming state, three effect symbols 35 (left symbol 35a, center symbol 35b, right symbol 35c) are temporarily stopped simultaneously.

  At the same time as the start of fluctuation, the host CPU 151 controls the audio control circuit 300 (rendering sound output command) to output a fluctuation start sound (51), and uses a sound channel different from the fluctuation start sound to perform normal fluctuation BGM ( 15) Start output. Furthermore, the host CPU 151 reproduces and outputs fluctuating sounds and the like of the effect pattern 35 by using another sound channel.

At the fluctuation stop timing, the host CPU 151 controls the sound control circuit 300 (rendering sound output command) to continuously input fluctuation stop sounds (52) for the three rendering symbols on one sound channel.
As described above for the effect button continuous hitting sound, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the same sound number is given to the sound of the same content, and when the sound of the same sound number is continuously reproduced and output, It is designed to continuously input to the same audio channel.
As a result, the limited number of audio channels provided in the audio control circuit 300 can be efficiently used.

  The same applies to the fluctuation stop sound (52), and the fluctuation stop sounds of the three effect patterns 35 (35a, 35b, 35c) are the same, and the same fluctuation stop sound (52) is set for each.

  As a result, the fluctuation stop sounds (52) for the three rendering symbols 35 are input to the same variable channel with a slight time difference, and as a result, the fluctuation stop sound that sounds as one sound is output.

That is, a plurality of variable stop sounds (52) based on the same data are input to the same audio channel, and are output while overwriting (while stopping the output of the previously input variable stop sound).
By inputting the same variable stop sound (52) to the same variable channel, compared to the case where three variable stop sounds (52) are output using different audio channels, only one audio channel is used. Can use the audio channel more efficiently.
By continuously inputting the fluctuation stop sound for the three production symbols, only the fluctuation stop sound for one production symbol (the middle symbol 35 b input last) may be output.

As described above, even if the variation start sound of the same content is different voice (different data), the variation start sound of the same content is input to different voice channels as in the case of FIG.
As a result, it is conceivable that the player may hear the voice through as it is, but such inconvenience can be resolved by doing as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when outputting the fluctuation stop sound (52) in accordance with the temporary stop of the left symbol 35a, the volume of the speaker on the left side toward the player is the right side toward the player. When controlling to become larger than the volume of the speaker and outputting the fluctuation stop sound (52) in accordance with the temporary stop of the right symbol 35c, the volume of the speaker on the right side toward the player is The volume of the speakers is controlled to be higher than the volume of the right speaker, and when the variable stop sound (52) is output according to the temporary stop of the central symbol 35b, the volume of the left and right speakers is Control each to be the same.

As in the case of FIG. 82, when the fluctuation stop sound (52) for the three production symbols 35 is inputted to the same variable channel with a slight time difference, the fluctuation stop sound (52) for the left symbol 35a, 35c for the right symbol It will be inputted in order of the fluctuation stop sound for (52), and the fluctuation stop sound (52) for the central symbol 35c.
As a result, what remains in the player's ear is the fluctuation stop sound (52) for the central symbol 35b input last.
A variation stop sound (52) for the middle symbol 35 (b), that is, a variation stop sound controlled so that the volume of the left and right speakers is the same, and the player naturally stops the variation stop sound You can listen to

In addition, instead of outputting the same three variable stop sounds (52) from the same variable channel (continuously), the variable stop sound (52) of only one sound is reproduced and output using one variable channel. You may do so.
This is not a fluctuation stop sound that can be heard as a single sound, but literally a fluctuation stop sound of only one sound.

In the case of outputting the fluctuation stop sound of only one sound, the fluctuation stop sound (52) for the middle symbol, that is, the fluctuation stop sound controlled so that the volume of the left and right speakers becomes the same is outputted.
The player can listen to the fluctuation stop sound output in this way in a natural manner.

FIG. 83 is a timing chart showing an example of an output aspect of the fluctuation stop sound in the case where the left and right effect symbols change and stop simultaneously at the time of the specific reach effect.
The numbers in parentheses indicate the sound numbers of the effect sound.

At the start of fluctuation at timing t71, the host CPU 151 controls the voice control circuit 300 (rendering sound output command) to output a fluctuation start sound, and uses BGM (non-reaching) using a sound channel different from the fluctuation start sound. 11) Start output of (13) or (13).
Furthermore, the host CPU 151 reproduces and outputs fluctuating sounds and the like of the effect pattern 35 by using another sound channel.

At the start timing t72 of the reach effect, the host CPU 151 controls the voice control circuit 300 (effect sound stop command) to stop the BGM (11) or (13) during non-reach, and the left symbol 35a and the right symbol Different fluctuating stop sounds (separate audio data) for 35c are output using two different audio channels.
As for the central symbol 35b, since the variable display is continued, the variable stop sound is not output.

After the start of the reach effect, the host CPU 151 controls the voice control circuit 300 (effect sound output command) to output BGM during reach.
In this case, the variable stop sound for the left symbol 35a and the right symbol 35c occupies two variable channels, and it can not be said that the voice channel can be used efficiently.

This is because, in the case of another sound (another data) even if the fluctuation stop sound has the same content, the fluctuation start sound having the same content is input to different sound channels.
Even when the variation stop sound of each rendering pattern is the same data, the same problem occurs when the control is performed to input the variation stop sound to a different audio channel for each rendering pattern.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variable stop sounds are generated using the audio channel more efficiently.

  FIG. 84 is a timing chart showing an output mode of the fluctuation stop sound in the case where the left and right production symbols temporarily stop the fluctuation at the time of the reach effect in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The numbers in parentheses indicate the sound numbers of the effect sound.

  At the start of fluctuation at timing t81, the host CPU 151 controls the voice control circuit 300 (rendering sound output command) to output the fluctuation start sound (51), and at the same time, non-reach using a sound channel different from the fluctuation start sound. Start the middle BGM output. Furthermore, the host CPU 151 reproduces and outputs fluctuating sounds and the like of the effect pattern 35 by using another sound channel.

At the start timing t 82 of the reach effect, the host CPU 151 controls the voice control circuit 300 (rendering sound stop command) to stop the non-reaching BGM while stopping the change stop sound (52) for the two effect patterns. Input one audio channel continuously.
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the same sound number is assigned to the voice having the same content, and when the same sound number is continuously input, the sound is continuously input to the same audio channel. As a result, the limited number of audio channels provided in the audio control circuit 300 can be efficiently used.

The same applies to the fluctuation stop sound (52), and the fluctuation stop sounds for the two effect patterns 35 (35a, 35c) have the same content, and the same fluctuation stop sound (52) is set for each.
As a result, the fluctuation stop sound (52) for the two rendering symbols 35 is input to the same variable channel with a slight time difference, and as a result, the fluctuation stop sound (52) that sounds as one sound is output.

That is, a plurality of variable stop sounds (52) based on the same data are input to the same audio channel and overwritten (while the output of the previously input variable stop sound is stopped).
By inputting the same variable stop sound (52) to the same variable channel, only one audio channel is used as compared to the case where two variable stop sounds (52) are output using different audio channels. Can use the audio channel more efficiently.
By continuously inputting the fluctuation stop sound for the two production symbols, only the fluctuation stop sound for one production symbol (the right symbol 35c input last) may be output.

As described above, even if the variation start sound of the same content is different voice (different data), the variation start sound of the same content is input to different voice channels as in the case of FIG.
As a result, the player can hear the voice through as it is, but such inconvenience can be resolved by doing as described above.
It should be noted that, instead of outputting the same two variable stop sounds, one variable channel may be used to reproduce and output the single stop sound (53).

The fluctuation stop sound (52) of the effect pattern 35 described above is reproduced and output when the effect pattern 35 is temporarily stopped, and is not output when the effect pattern 35 is determined and stopped.
That is, the fluctuation stop sound (52) is the fluctuation stop sound of the effect pattern 35 and is not the fluctuation stop sound of the special symbol.

Moreover, although the fluctuation | variation stop sound output at the time of temporary stop of the fluctuation | variation of the production | presentation pattern 35 was demonstrated above, the same thing can be said also about the fluctuation | variation start sound (51) which generate | occur | produces at the time of the fluctuation | variation start of the production | generation pattern 35.
Of course, this fluctuation start sound (51) is only the fluctuation start sound of the effect pattern 35, not the fluctuation start sound of the special symbol.

  Further, as described above, when outputting the fluctuation stop sound (52) in accordance with the temporary stop of the left symbol 35a, the volume of the speaker on the left side toward the player is higher than the volume of the speaker on the right side. When controlling to become large and outputting the fluctuation stop sound (52) according to the temporary stop of the right symbol 35c, the volume of the speaker on the right side toward the player and the volume of the speaker on the left side toward the player are Control to be higher than the volume of the speaker on the right side, and when outputting the fluctuation stop sound (52) according to the temporary stop of the central symbol 35b, the volume of the left and right speakers will be the same respectively Control.

  However, when reach is established, when the left and right symbols stop simultaneously, the left symbol 35a → the right symbol 35b temporarily stop due to the time difference, the variation stop sound (52) for the middle symbol in each case, that is, the volume of the left and right speakers Output the fluctuating stop sound controlled to be the same.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an aspect from the stop aspect of the effect symbol in the gaming machine of the present embodiment to immediately after the start of fluctuation.
Basically, since the effect pattern 35 (left pattern 35a, central pattern 35b, right pattern 35c) shifts the timing to start changing, the fluctuation start sound for each effect pattern starts outputting at different timings. Be done.
For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the effect pattern 35 starts to change in the order of the left pattern 35a (b), the right pattern 35c (c) and the central pattern 35c (d).
However, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the three effect symbols 35 (left symbol 35a, center symbol 35b, right symbol 35c) may simultaneously start variation.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the effect pattern 35 outputs the fluctuation start sound (51) according to the start of fluctuation of the left pattern 35a, the speaker (voice output device) 34 among the left and right sides The volume of the left speaker toward the player is controlled to be higher than the volume of the right speaker.
When outputting the fluctuation start sound (51) in accordance with the start of fluctuation of the right symbol 35c, the volume of the right speaker toward the player, the volume of the left speaker, the volume of the right speaker Control to be larger than.
When the variation start sound (51) is output in synchronization with the start of variation of the central symbol 35b, control is performed so that the volume of the left and right speakers becomes the same.
As a result, when the variation starts in the order of left → right → center, the player can enjoy three-dimensional sound about the variation start sound of the effect pattern.

  In the following, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a voice output process and an output mode in the case where a plurality of variation start sounds are simultaneously generated when the plurality of effect symbols 35 simultaneously start variation under specific conditions will be described.

FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing an example of the output mode of the fluctuation start sound in the case where the three effect symbols start fluctuation simultaneously.
The numbers in parentheses indicate the sound numbers of the effect sound.

At the same time as the start of fluctuation, the host CPU 151 controls the audio control circuit 300 (rendering sound output command) to output a fluctuation start sound (51).
In this example, since the left symbol 35a, the central symbol 35b, and the right symbol 35c simultaneously start to change, three different variable start sounds are reproduced and output for different effect symbols 35 using different variable channels.
At the same time, the output of BGM is started using an audio channel other than these fluctuation start sounds.

Furthermore, the host CPU 151 reproduces and outputs fluctuating sounds and the like of the effect pattern 35 by using another sound channel.
In such a case, three variable channels will be occupied by different variation start sounds (different voice data) for the left symbol 35a and the right symbol 35c for the reason described below, and the voice channel can be used efficiently. It can not be said that

This is because even if the variation start sound of the same content is different voice (different data), the variation start sound of the same content is input to different voice channels.
Even when the variation start sound of each rendering pattern is the same data, the same problem occurs when the control is performed to input the variation start sound to a different audio channel for each rendering pattern.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variable stop sounds are generated using the audio channel more efficiently.

FIG. 87 is a timing chart showing an example of the output mode of the fluctuation start sound in the case where the three rendering symbols start to fluctuate simultaneously in the gaming machine of the present embodiment.
The numbers in parentheses indicate the sound numbers of the effect sound.

At the same time as the start of fluctuation, the host CPU 151 controls the audio control circuit 300 (rendering sound output command) to output a fluctuation start sound (51).
Furthermore, the host CPU 151 reproduces and outputs fluctuating sounds and the like of the effect pattern 35 by using another sound channel.
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the left symbol 35a, the central symbol 35b, and the right symbol 35c simultaneously start changing, the same change start sound (51) for three effect symbols is continuously made in one voice channel. Enter in

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the same sound number is assigned to the voice having the same content, and when the same sound number is continuously input, the sound is continuously input to the same audio channel.
As a result, the limited number of audio channels provided in the audio control circuit 300 can be efficiently used.

  The same applies to the fluctuation start sound (51), and the fluctuation start sounds of the three effect patterns 35 (35a, 35b, 35c) are the same, and the same fluctuation start sound (51) is set for each.

As a result, the fluctuation start sounds (51) of the three rendering symbols 35 are input to the same variable channel with a slight time difference, and as a result, the fluctuation start sound (51) that sounds as one sound is output. That is, a plurality of fluctuation start sounds (51) based on the same data are input to the same audio channel and are outputted while overwriting (while stopping the output of the fluctuation stop sound inputted earlier).
By inputting the same fluctuation start sound (51) to the same channel, compared to the case where three fluctuation start sounds (51) are respectively output using different audio channels, only one audio channel is used, Audio channels can be used more efficiently.
By continuously inputting the fluctuation start sound of the three rendering symbols, only the fluctuation stop sound of one of the rendering symbols (the middle symbol 35c input last) may be output.

When another voice (different data) is used as the variation start sound of the same content, as in the case of FIG. 86, the variation start sound of the same content is input to different voice channels.
As a result, it is conceivable that the player may hear the voice through as it is, but such inconvenience can be resolved by doing as described above.

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when outputting the fluctuation start sound (51) according to the fluctuation start of the left symbol 35a, of the left and right speakers (voice output device) 34, When controlling the volume of the speaker on the left side toward the player to be higher than the volume of the speaker on the right side and outputting the variation start sound (51) in accordance with the start of variation of the right symbol 35c, The volume of the speaker on the right side toward the player is controlled so that the volume of the speaker on the left side is greater than the volume of the speaker on the right side, and the variation start sound ( When outputting 51), control is performed so that the volume of the left and right speakers becomes the same.

As in the case of FIG. 84, when the variation start sounds (51) for the three rendering symbols 35 are input to the same variable channel with a slight time difference, the variation start sound (51) for the left symbol 35a, 35c for the right symbol It will be inputted in order of the fluctuation start sound for (51), and the fluctuation start sound (51) for the central symbol 35c.
As a result, what remains in the player's ear is the fluctuation start sound (51) for the central symbol 35b inputted last.
The variation start sound (51) for the middle symbol 35 (b), that is, the variation start sound controlled so that the volume of the left and right speakers is the same, and the player naturally starts the variation start sound It is possible to listen to

Note that instead of outputting the same three variable stop sounds, one variable channel may be used to reproduce and output the change start sound (51) of only one sound.
This is not a fluctuation start sound that sounds as one sound, but a fluctuation stop sound of only one sound literally.
In the case of outputting the fluctuation stop sound of only one sound, the fluctuation stop sound (52) for the middle symbol, that is, the fluctuation stop sound controlled so that the volume of the left and right speakers becomes the same is outputted.
The player can listen to the fluctuation stop sound output in this way in a natural manner.

  In the case of simultaneously starting output of effect sound (variation start sound, fluctuation stop sound) on two or more effect designs, an effect sound on one effect pattern is output.

<Other Embodiments>
The host CPU 151 treats, as a group, a plurality of effect sounds being reproduced and output by a plurality of audio channels of the audio control circuit 300 as a group, and collectively controls (volume change, output stop, etc.) It is possible.
The group of the effect sound is performed using the sound number, and the voice control unit 301 refers to the above-mentioned status information for the sound channel outputting the effect sound of the sound number included in the group designated by the effect sound designation command. Identify and control.

A liquid crystal display device, a rear projector, or any other display device can be adopted as the image display device of the gaming machine 1.
Further, the display mode of the image display device of the present invention can be applied not only to pachinko machines but also to slot machines, other gaming machines having display devices, and gaming machines in general.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 game machine, 10 game board, 13 1st starting opening, 14 2nd starting opening, 31 image display device, 35 decoration symbol, 110 main control board, 111 main CPU, 112 main ROM, 113 main RAM, 120 effect control board , 121 sub CPU, 122 sub ROM, 123 sub RAM, 140 lamp control board, 150 image control board, 151 host CPU, 152 host RAM, 153 host ROM

Claims (1)

A determination unit that determines whether or not to execute a predetermined special game upon establishment of the start condition;
An image display device capable of displaying an image relating to an effect;
Symbol variation display means for variably displaying a symbol based on the determination result by the determination means;
Effect control means for executing, using the image display device, a variable effect of the effect pattern based on the determination result in accordance with the variable display of the pattern;
Storage means for storing voice information;
Voice control means for performing control to output a voice based on the voice information from a voice output means according to the progress of the fluctuation effect;
Operation means operable by the player;
A setting unit capable of setting an operation effective period for effectively receiving an operation on the operation unit during the execution of the fluctuation effect;
Equipped with
The voice control means
During the progression of the fluctuation production, output a specific sound according to the progression of the fluctuation production,
The particular voice comprises a first voice and a second voice output after the first voice,
The voice control means
When the operating lifetime in the output of the second audio is started, to stop the output of the second audio,
After the output of the second voice is stopped, when the operation means is operated in the operation valid period, when the effect of the first effect content based on the determination result is executed, the second voice is While outputting a voice according to the first effect content and outputting a voice according to the second effect content when the effect of the second effect content based on the determination result is executed. ,
When an effect of the first effect content based on the determination result is executed after the end of the operation effective period, when the operation means is not operated in the operation effective period, it relates to the second sound. The voice according to the first effect content is output, and when the effect of the second effect content based on the determination result is executed, the voice according to the second effect content is output,
After outputting the sound according to the content of the second effect, the first sound is output at a predetermined timing, and after the sound corresponding to the content of the first effect is output, the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by not outputting the first voice until it is done.

Images